training manual combinationf

372
© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

Upload: neagu-alexandru

Post on 22-Oct-2015

362 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

DESCRIPTION

Training Coffe Machine Service

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Training Manual CombiNationF

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

Page 2: Training Manual CombiNationF

Hints

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/0-2

© 2002/2004 WMF Aktiengesellschaft Coffee Machines Division Postfach 1401 . D-73309 Geislingen/Steige . Germany All rights reserved, in particular duplication, distribution and translation rights. No part of this Manual may be reproduced in any form (by photocopying, on microfilm or otherwise) or processed, duplicated or distributed using electronic systems without written consent.

Design and production / typesetting and print presentation: TecDoc GmbH; Geislingen, [email protected]

Page 3: Training Manual CombiNationF

0/0 Hints

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-3

Key to symbols

N.B.: Cross-reference

Hazard Notes

AbbreviationsF 1 ... F X Error codes STL Safety temperature limiter MC Multicounter KD Service KW Cold water HW Hot water FM Flow meter GC Grounds catcher CAN Controller Area Network Urn (1) Storage urn (1) PTC Positive temperature-coefficient resistor (heater) STV Power supply unit KS Waiter lock ISB Hogatron interface box VKS Hogatron cash register KMT Coffee-machine terminal (includes KS and buttonboard)

Page 4: Training Manual CombiNationF

Hints

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/0-4

How to use this Manual

This Manual comprises 10 parts. The Table of Contents for the whole Manual can be found on the following pages.

Part 1 - Basics ..contains the technical data and all the information needed up to first use of the machine.

Part 2 - Engineering ..describes one assembly, such as the boiler system, at the beginning of each chapter. That assembly is then disassembled into its components with detailed illustrations and an explanation of how it operates.

Part 3 – Cleaning .. contains precise instructions on the care and cleaning of the WMF combiNation F.

Part 4 – Software .. contains the software. The basic structures of the software programs are presented. Details on setting and operating the coffee machine are provided, along with step-by-step explanations.

Part 5 - Service .. includes all the data and information relevant to WMF Service on site. Service routines, the maintenance schedule and operating sequences are described.This part also contains the WMF Service checklists.

Part 6 – Drawings .. all the drawings of the WMF combiNation F that are relevant to WMF Service can be found here.

Part 7 – Spare parts list .. the spare parts list for the WMF combiNation F.

Part 8 – Operating instructions .. operating instructions for the WMF combiNation F.

Part 9 – Notes .. space for your own notes on the WMF combiNation F.

Part 10 – Index .. a list of headings to help you find your way around this Manual quickly.

Page 5: Training Manual CombiNationF

0/1 Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-1

Table of contents Key to symbols..............................................................................................................3Abbreviations................................................................................................................3How to use this Manual................................................................................................4Table of contents...........................................................................................................1

Part 1 - Basics 11/1 General information 11/1.1 Designation of machine parts.......................................................................31/1.2 Description of components ...........................................................................4

1/1.2.1 Basic modules 51/1.2.2 Optional modules 6

1/1.3 Standard versions WMF combiNation F ....................................................91/1.4 Upgrade modules for WMF combiNation F...............................................91/1.5 Rating plate information ............................................................................111/1.6 Technical data .............................................................................................12

1/1.6.1 Conditions of use and installation 131/1.6.2 Technical data - motors 151/1.6.3 Technical data - valves 161/1.6.4 Technical data - heaters 171/1.6.5 Technical data - relays 171/1.6.6 Technical data - miscellaneous 171/1.6.7 Technical data – chocolate dispenser 19

1/2 Connecting the WMF combiNation F 11/2.1 Preparing for connection..............................................................................11/2.2 Checklist in preparation for connection .....................................................2

Siting the machine......................................................................................2Electrical connection ..................................................................................3Water connection........................................................................................4Additional notes for alternative routing of connections .............................5Single coffee machine ................................................................................5Through the rear cover ...............................................................................5Through the bottom plate, at the rear .........................................................6Through the bottom plate near the brewer drain ........................................6

1/2.2.1 Connecting the WMF water filter, WMF combiNation F 71/2.3 Safety instructions in preparation for connection .....................................81/2.4 Connection checklist .....................................................................................9

View of WMF combiNation F ...................................................................9Side view, WMF combiNation F - single coffee machine .......................10Side view, WMF combiNation F - double coffee machine ......................10Top view, WMF combiNation F - single coffee machine .......................11Top view, WMF combiNation F - double coffee machine......................11Front and side views, Chocolate dispenser...............................................12Front and side views, grounds ejector ......................................................13

1/2.5 Safety instructions for connection .............................................................141/2.5.1 Instructions to be followed: 141/2.5.2 Regulations applicable / Approvals 14

1/3 Starting the machine 11/3.1 Safety instructions.........................................................................................11/3.2 Start-up procedure........................................................................................3

Page 6: Training Manual CombiNationF

Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-2

Part 2 - Engineering 12/1 Coffee hoppers 12/1.1 Ground coffee hopper (GCH) ......................................................................2

2/1.1.1 Ground-coffee portioner - motor 32/1.1.2 Light barrier GCH (optional) 4

2/1.2 Manual input for sampling of ground coffee ..............................................4

2/2 Boiler and pipework 12/2.1 Cold water connection ..................................................................................2

2/2.1.1 Cold water inlet 22/2.1.1.1 Water distributor with bypass for water filter .....................................32/2.1.1.2 Connection nipple ...............................................................................32/2.1.1.3 Non-return valve .................................................................................32/2.1.1.4 Water pressure control device.............................................................42/2.1.1.5 Pressure reducer ..................................................................................4

2/2.2 Boiler system..................................................................................................52/2.2.1 Boiler 62/2.2.2 Boiler heaters 72/2.2.3 Temperature sensor 82/2.2.4 Boiler manometer 82/2.2.5 Hot water spout with sieve 92/2.2.6 Safety temperature limiter (STL) 92/2.2.7 Boiler safety valve 102/2.2.8 Burst protection 10

2/2.3 Hot water output .........................................................................................112/2.3.1 Hot water output valve 122/2.3.2 Hot water spout 122/2.3.3 Swirler 12

2/2.4 Brewing-water system.................................................................................132/2.4.1 Valve group 14

2/2.4.1.1 Brewing valve ...................................................................................142/2.4.1.2 Brewing valve nozzle........................................................................142/2.4.1.3 Jet valve urn1 ....................................................................................152/2.4.1.4 Jet valve nozzle urn1.........................................................................152/2.4.1.5 Inlet rinsing valve .............................................................................152/2.4.1.6 Rinsing valve Urn 1 ..........................................................................16

2/2.4.2 Outlet rinsing valve / Rinsing valve for grounds ejector 162/2.4.3 Flow meter (FM) 172/2.4.4 Brewing pressure manometer 17

Page 7: Training Manual CombiNationF

0/1 Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-3

2/3 Brewing unit 12/3.1 Brewing unit ..................................................................................................2

2/3.1.1 Brewer drive 22/3.1.1.1 Brewer drive, motor............................................................................22/3.1.1.2 Brewer drive, cam disc .......................................................................22/3.1.1.3 Switch plate ........................................................................................3

2/3.1.2 Brewer base 32/3.1.2.1 Brewing sieve, complete.....................................................................32/3.1.2.2 Piston ..................................................................................................32/3.1.2.3 Sleeve .................................................................................................4

2/3.1.3 Brewer, top section 42/3.1.3.1 Distribution sieve................................................................................42/3.1.3.2 Rinsing ring ........................................................................................52/3.1.3.3 Cleaning motor ...................................................................................52/3.1.3.4 Crank, complete..................................................................................52/3.1.3.5 Inlet funnel..........................................................................................52/3.1.3.6 Inlet rinsing nozzle .............................................................................62/3.1.3.7 Fan ......................................................................................................6

2/3.1.4 Brewing chamber positions 7

2/4 Storage urn and coffee output 12/4.1 Storage urn, complete...................................................................................22/4.2 Urn heater......................................................................................................22/4.3 Level controller for storage urn...................................................................32/4.4 Probe ..............................................................................................................32/4.5 Urn cover .......................................................................................................42/4.6 Coffee and rinsing water inlets and outlets on the Urn cover...................42/4.7 Coffee hose heater .........................................................................................42/4.8 Coffee valve group urn1 / urn2....................................................................52/4.9 Coffee spout ...................................................................................................52/4.10 Inlet valves on double coffee machine .........................................................52/4.11 Urn 2 rinsing valve........................................................................................6

2/5 Controls 12/5.1 Front door......................................................................................................1

2/5.1.1 Touch display 12/5.1.2 Start buttons 2

2/5.2 Start buttons for urn2 on double coffee machine.......................................22/5.3 Key switch......................................................................................................22/5.4 Hot water dispensing ....................................................................................3

Portioned ....................................................................................................3Free-flow....................................................................................................3Start-Stop....................................................................................................3Free-flow, portioned...................................................................................3

2/5.5 Hot water button...........................................................................................4

2/6 Electronics 12/6.1 PCB ................................................................................................................12/6.2 Power stage ....................................................................................................1

Page 8: Training Manual CombiNationF

Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-4

2/7 Electrical system 12/7.1 Power supply unit..........................................................................................1

2/7.1.1 Power-on relay (solid-state relay SSR) 22/7.1.2 Transformers 22/7.1.3 24 V rectifier and filter capacitor 22/7.1.4 Heater protection relay 2

2/7.2 Cable forms....................................................................................................32/7.3 Coupling relay on special voltage versions (ship version) .........................32/7.4 Transformer on special voltage (ship version)............................................3

2/8 Accounting options 12/8.1 Accounting unit SE .......................................................................................1

2/8.1.1 Serial interface 22/8.1.1.1 General................................................................................................22/8.1.1.2 Function ..............................................................................................22/8.1.1.3 Description of the operating modes ....................................................3

Credit mode................................................................................................3Free credit mode.........................................................................................3Credit mode with credit key .......................................................................3Waiter-related credit mode.........................................................................4Debit mode .................................................................................................4Table input .................................................................................................4Without mandatory table input...................................................................5With mandatory table input........................................................................5Table protection on.....................................................................................6Table protection off ....................................................................................6Operation without ISB or external MC3 ....................................................6

2/8.1.1.4 Serial extension (SE) board ................................................................72/8.1.1.5 Interface with cable set .......................................................................82/8.1.1.6 Routing the interface cables................................................................82/8.1.1.7 Waiter lock..........................................................................................9

2/8.1.2 Parallel 102/8.1.2.1 General..............................................................................................102/8.1.2.2 Power supply connection, CAN connection .....................................112/8.1.2.3 Time sequence of product release.....................................................112/8.1.2.4 Not enabled by dispensing system....................................................112/8.1.2.5 Not enabled by coffee machine.........................................................112/8.1.2.6 Parallel extension board....................................................................12

2/8.2 Vending machines .......................................................................................132/8.2.1 Coin checker (MP) 13

2/8.2.1.1 Front panel ........................................................................................132/8.2.1.2 Switch “Free”....................................................................................142/8.2.1.3 Checker..................................................................................................142/8.2.1.4 Coin slot............................................................................................142/8.2.1.5 Coin drawer.......................................................................................152/8.2.1.6 Cable connecting coin checker to main machine ..................................15

Page 9: Training Manual CombiNationF

0/1 Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-5

2/8.2.2 Coin changer (MW) MDB 162/8.2.2.1 Coin slot............................................................................................162/8.2.2.2 Coin tester.........................................................................................162/9.2.2.3 Coin drawer ......................................................................................172/8.2.2.4 Coin changer, complete (CF690 Series)...........................................172/8.2.2.5 Cable between machine and mounting plate ....................................182/8.2.2.6 Display..............................................................................................182/8.2.2.7 Keypad..............................................................................................182/8.2.2.8 Serial extension with MDB module .................................................192/8.2.2.9 Power supply unit .............................................................................19

2/8.2.3 Card reader (KL) MDB 202/8.2.3.1 Card reader (KL) (example) .............................................................202/8.2.3.2 Cable connection machine-mounting plate ......................................212/8.2.3.3 Display..............................................................................................212/8.2.3.4 Keypad..............................................................................................212/8.2.3.5 Serial extension with MDB module .................................................21

2/8.2.4 Card reader (KL) 8-price 222/8.2.4.1 Product release sequence ..................................................................22

Normal sequence ......................................................................................23No release from card reader (KL) ............................................................23No release by coffee machine ..................................................................23

2/8.2.4.2 Transfer connector, 8-price ...................................................................232/8.2.4.3 Card reader (KL) (example) .............................................................242/8.2.4.4 Cable between machine and mounting plate ....................................242/8.2.4.5 SE module ........................................................................................242/8.2.4.6 Power supply unit .............................................................................25

2/8.3 WMF Multicounter (MC) CAN.................................................................26

2/9 Cleaning 12/9.1 Automatic cleaning with granulate .............................................................1

2/9.1.1 Cleaning granulate portioner, complete 12/9.1.2 Granulate light barrier with solenoid 22/9.1.3 Soleonid 2

Empty signal...............................................................................................2

2/10 combiNation chocolate dispenser 12/10.1 Chocolate powder hopper (CPH) ................................................................1

2/10.1.1 Empty message 12/10.1.2 Chocolate powder hopper (CPH) motor 22/10.1.3 Base unit 22/10.1.4 Auger 2

2/10.2 Chocolate dispenser piping system..............................................................32/10.2.1 Chocolate dispenser hot water valve (heated) 32/10.2.2 HW valve aperture 32/10.2.3 HW valve heating (PTC heating) 42/10.2.4 Chocolate dispenser cold water valve 42/10.2.5 Adjustable aperture 42/10.2.6 Hot water connection to combiNation 5

2/10.3 Mixer system .................................................................................................62/10.3.1 Mixer motor with interference filter 62/10.3.2 SSR 62/10.3.3 Mixer housing with hopper, angle connection and pipe 72/10.3.4 Fan 7

2/10.4 Adjustable spout ...........................................................................................7

Page 10: Training Manual CombiNationF

Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-6

2/10.5 Door switch/safety switch .............................................................................82/10.6 Controls..........................................................................................................8

2/10.6.1 Front panel/dispensing key 8

2/11 Grounds ejector 12/11.1 Principle of operation ...................................................................................12/11.2 Upper section with first filter .......................................................................2

2/11.2.1 Rinsing nozzle 22/11.2.2 Sieve of first filter 2

2/11.3 Frame .............................................................................................................32/11.4 Grounds container ........................................................................................3

2/11.4.1 Container sieve 32/11.4.2 Ball valve 4

2/11.5 Grounds sensor with height adjustment .....................................................4

Part 3 – Cleaning 13/1 General information on cleaning 13/1.1 Daily cleaning ................................................................................................1

3/2 Cleaning the machine 13/2.1 Fully-automatic cleaning ..............................................................................13/2.2 Semi-automatic cleaning...............................................................................43/2.3 Timer-controlled cleaning ............................................................................6

3/3 Cleaning the chocolate dispenser 13/3.1 Daily cleaning ................................................................................................13/3.2 Intermediate cleaning ...................................................................................13/3.3 Weekly cleaning.............................................................................................2

Part 4 - Software 14/1 Software user guide 14/1.1 User guide ......................................................................................................14/1.2 Legend to button fields .................................................................................24/1.3 General notes on the dialogues.....................................................................3

4/1.3.1 Setting options 34/1.3.2 Setting numeric values 3

Description of the marks on the bar graph .................................................3

4/2 Software overview 14/2.1 Functions in the selection menu ...................................................................1

4/3 Coffee storage 14/3.1 Preselection quantities ..................................................................................2

4/4 Timer selection 14/4.1 Timer status (ON/OFF) ................................................................................24/4.2 Setting the timer ............................................................................................24/4.3 Copying functions between days..................................................................34/4.4 Timer overview..............................................................................................44/4.5 Clearing the timer .........................................................................................4

4/5 Cleaning 1

Page 11: Training Manual CombiNationF

0/1 Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-7

4/6 Settings 14/6.1 Setting the products ......................................................................................1

4/6.1.1 Setting the coffee and hot water quantities 14/6.1.2 Product selection 3

4/6.2 Machine settings............................................................................................44/6.2.1 Operating mode (self-service) 44/6.2.2 Amount of ground coffee 54/6.2.3 Boiler temperature 5

4/6.3 First Run Up..................................................................................................64/6.4 Setting the timer............................................................................................64/6.5 Setting the date and time..............................................................................64/6.6 Contrast .........................................................................................................7

4/7 PIN input 14/8 Rights - authorisations/PIN 14/9 Accounting 14/9.1 Unit without accounting facility ..................................................................14/9.2 Unit with accounting facility ........................................................................1

4/9.2.1 Serial 14/9.2.2 Multicounter (MC) 1

4/10 Manual dispensing 14/10.1 Machines without accounting/vending machines ...........................................14/10.2 Machines with accounting/vending machines.................................................1

4/11 Information 14/11.1 Customer information key ...........................................................................14/11.2 Service ............................................................................................................24/11.3 Timer..............................................................................................................2

4/12 Service 14/12.1 Access to Service ...........................................................................................14/12.2 Service - overview .........................................................................................1

4/12.2.1 Service - Product data 24/12.2.1.1 Entry to setting portioning and brewing .............................................2

Setting portioning – general .......................................................................3Setting brewing - general ...........................................................................3Setting brewing - brewing ..........................................................................3Setting brewing - jet water .........................................................................4

Page 12: Training Manual CombiNationF

Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-8

4/12.2.2 Service - machine data 54/12.2.2.1 Counters ..............................................................................................54/12.2.2.2 Cleaning ..............................................................................................64/12.2.2.3 Error list ..............................................................................................64/12.2.2.4 Service date.........................................................................................74/12.2.2.5 Maintenance counter...........................................................................74/12.2.2.6 Filter replacement ...............................................................................84/12.2.2.7 Grounds catcher ..................................................................................9

Operating mode, Grounds catcher..............................................................9Content to info............................................................................................9Level indicator............................................................................................9Flashing Time.............................................................................................9Maximum brewings....................................................................................9Display Time (from version 03.01.01) .......................................................9Grounds catcher information......................................................................9

4/12.2.2.8 Storage urn........................................................................................104/12.2.2.9 Boiler ................................................................................................104/12.2.2.10 Accessory Unit..................................................................................104/12.2.2.11 Accounting (MDAT) ........................................................................114/12.2.2.12 Self-service mode .............................................................................12

Error information......................................................................................12Confirmation ............................................................................................12

4/12.2.2.13 Double click......................................................................................12Double click .............................................................................................12Deceleration .............................................................................................12

4/12.2.2.14 Standards...........................................................................................134/12.2.3 Service – Component test 15

4/12.2.3.1 Brief description of tests ...................................................................16Submenu Portioner...................................................................................16Submenu Storage urn ...............................................................................17Submenu controls.....................................................................................17Submenu Cleaning ...................................................................................17

4/12.2.3.2 Examples of tests ..............................................................................184/12.2.3.3 Component test: chocolate dispenser................................................19

4/12.2.4 Service - Service routines 214/12.2.4.1 First run up........................................................................................214/12.2.4.2 Urn 1 calibration ...............................................................................214/12.2.4.3 Brewer rinsing...................................................................................214/12.2.4.4 Chocolate hopper adjustment* (CPH5) ............................................214/12.2.4.5 Descaling programme .......................................................................22

4/12.2.5 Service - service information 244/12.2.5.1 Software version ...............................................................................244/12.2.5.2 Front door .........................................................................................244/12.2.5.3 Power stage .......................................................................................244/12.2.5.4 Last Service visit...............................................................................244/12.2.5.5 Error list ............................................................................................24

Page 13: Training Manual CombiNationF

0/1 Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-9

4/12.2.6 Accounting 254/12.2.6.1 Serial.................................................................................................26

4/12.2.6.1.1 Service information (SE) ..................................................264/12.2.6.1.2 Debit .................................................................................264/12.2.6.1.3 Credit ................................................................................27

Credit-pool mode......................................................................................27Waiter-credit mode...................................................................................27Credit pen mode .......................................................................................27Credit pen number....................................................................................27Credit pen debit mode ..............................................................................27

4/12.2.6.1.4 Price line ...........................................................................284/12.2.6.1.5 Table number input...........................................................28

Table number input function ....................................................................28Mandatory table number input .................................................................28Table protection........................................................................................28

4/12.2.6.1.6 Waiter function .................................................................29Waiter lock ...............................................................................................29Dialogue ...................................................................................................29Waiter transfer..........................................................................................29

4/12.2.6.1.7 Interface ............................................................................294/12.2.6.1.8 Test mode .........................................................................294/12.2.6.1.9 Memory ............................................................................304/12.2.6.1.10 1st run-up..........................................................................304/12.2.6.1.11 Standards ..........................................................................30

4/12.2.6.2 Parallel ..............................................................................................314/12.2.6.2.1 Adjustable activation times...............................................314/12.2.6.2.2 Allocation of price categories ...........................................324/12.2.6.2.3 Parallel Standards .............................................................32

4/12.2.6.3 MDB .................................................................................................334/12.2.6.3.1 Setting with the foil keypad..............................................33

Number of products..................................................................................33Product prices...........................................................................................34For coin changer only...............................................................................34Filling with coins......................................................................................34Setting the maximum credit .....................................................................34Maximum amount returned ......................................................................35Tube combinations ...................................................................................35Token value ( 0...2) ..................................................................................35Settings for coin acceptance BDV6 (0...3) ...............................................36Select slave...............................................................................................37Select language.........................................................................................37

4/12.2.6.3.2 Settings on the machine display .......................................37First run up ...............................................................................................37

4/12.2.6.4 Card reader, 8-price ..........................................................................384/12.2.6.4.1 Connection........................................................................38

Card reader response time (WA-Answer) ................................................38Card reader credit clear (K0) time (KL-Credit CLR)...............................39

4/12.2.6.4.2 Assignment of the price lines ...........................................394/12.2.6.4.3 First run up........................................................................394/12.2.6.4.4 Card reader standards .......................................................39

4/12.2.6.5 Operation without accounting (software) .........................................40Machine data, without accounting............................................................40

4/12.2.6.6 Operation without accounting (hardware ) ......................................414/12.2.6.7 Miscellaneous ...................................................................................414/12.2.6.8 MC (CAN)........................................................................................41

Page 14: Training Manual CombiNationF

Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-10

4/13 Brewing sequences 14/13.1 Preheating ......................................................................................................14/13.2 Preselected quantities....................................................................................14/13.3 High-speed brewing ......................................................................................14/13.4 Aborting brewing ..........................................................................................14/13.5 Timing diagrams of brewing cycles .............................................................2

4/13.5.1 Hot rinse before each brewing cycle 24/13.5.2 Brewing cycle, 2 litres 24/13.5.3 Brewing cycle, ECO 34/13.5.4 Brewing cycle, 1 litre, manu(al 34/13.5.5 Hot rinse 44/13.5.6 Automatic cleaning 4

4/13.6 Chocolate products.......................................................................................54/13.6.1 Timing diagrams of chocolate products 5

4/14 Hot water dispensing 1

Part 5 - Service 15/1 Starting up 15/1.1 Settings checklist for starting up..................................................................1

5/1.1.1 Settings checklist with a laptop 15/1.1.2 Settings checklist without a laptop 2

5/1.2 Default values ................................................................................................35/1.2.1 Factory settings for machine data 3

Main menu .................................................................................................3Sub-menus..................................................................................................3

5/1.2.2 Factory settings for Product data 55/1.2.2.1 Portioning............................................................................................55/1.2.2.2 Brewing cycles....................................................................................6

5/1.2.3 Default button assignments 65/1.2.4 Default values; chocolate dispenser start keys 6

5/2 Product data 15/2.1 Service - Product data 1

5/2.1.1 Entry to setting portioning and brewing .............................................1Setting portioning – general .......................................................................2Setting brewing - general ...........................................................................2Setting brewing - brewing ..........................................................................2Setting brewing - jet water .........................................................................3

5/2.3 Setting ranges for Product data ...................................................................35/2.3.1 General 35/2.3.2 Brewing 45/2.3.3 Adding water 4

5/3 Machine data 15/3.1 Overview software “Machine data” ............................................................1

5/3.1.1 Main menu “Machine data” 15/3.1.2 Submenus “Machine data” 2

5/4 Component test 15/4.1 Overview software “Component test”.........................................................1

5/4.1.1 Main menu “Component test” 15/4.1.2 Submenus “Component Test” 2

Page 15: Training Manual CombiNationF

0/1 Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-11

5/5 Service routines 15/5.1 Overview software “Service Routines” .......................................................1

5/5.1.1 Main menu “Service Routines” 15/5.2 Tips and Hints “Service Routines”..............................................................2

5/5.2.1 Urn calibration 25/5.2.2 First run up 25/5.2.3 Descaling programme 2

5/6 Service info 15/6.1 Overview software “Service Info” ...............................................................15/6.2 Main menu “Service Info” ...........................................................................1

5/7 Mechanical adjustments 15/7.1 Ground-coffee portioner (GCH), setting the nozzles ................................15/7.2 Front door, alignment and ease of movement ............................................25/7.3 Adjusting the inlet nozzle .............................................................................2

5/8 Maintenance 15/8.1 Industrial safety ............................................................................................1

5/8.1.1 Goggles 15/8.1.2 Safety instructions 1

Retrofitting, module feet ............................................................................25/8.2 General notes.................................................................................................25/8.3 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................35/8.4 Chocolate dispenser maintenance schedule................................................55/8.5 Descaling Programme...................................................................................55/8.6 Spare parts / Maintenance sets WMF combiNation F............................7

5/8.6.1 Maintenance set, valves and boiler - 33 2756 7000 75/8.6.2 Maintenance set, storage urn/brewer – 33 2756 8000 7

5/8.7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................8Problems with the taste of the coffee .........................................................8

5/8.8 Error list ........................................................................................................9Acknowledgment texts .............................................................................12

5/9 Installing retrofit modules 15/9.1 Installing the „choc connection” retrofit module.......................................1

5/9.1.1 Instructions including fitting the harness 15/9.2 Installation of serial extension / installation of waiter lock ......................7

5/9.2.1 Installation of SE 8Installation of waiter lock...........................................................................9

5/10 Important infos 15/10.1 Year 2002 .......................................................................................................15/10.2 Year 2003 .......................................................................................................15/10.3 Year 2004 .......................................................................................................1

Page 16: Training Manual CombiNationF

Table of contents

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

0/1-12

Part 6 - Drawings 16.1 Drawings combiNation F..............................................................................1

Main dimension drawing, single coffee .....................................................1Main dimension drawing, double coffee ....................................................1Main dimension drawing, single coffee, ship version ................................1Main dimension drawing, double coffee, ship version...............................1Main dimension drawing, single coffee, with rear tap ...............................1Piping diagram, single coffee.....................................................................1Piping diagram, double coffee....................................................................1Piping diagram, single coffee, ship version................................................1Piping diagram, double -coffee, ship version .............................................1VP Front door.............................................................................................1VP Power stage ..........................................................................................1VP basic unit, single coffee........................................................................1VP basic unit, double coffee.......................................................................1VP power supply 13,5 kW .........................................................................1VP power supply 200V ..............................................................................1VP power supply 440V ..............................................................................1VP power supply 440V, ship version .........................................................1VP dispensing on backside.........................................................................1Circuit diagram...........................................................................................1Circuit diagram, table .................................................................................1VP serial interface ......................................................................................1VP parallel interface...................................................................................1VP multicounter .........................................................................................1VP power supply 230V ..............................................................................12 x power supply; ship version 400V.........................................................1Power optimization connection cNF ..........................................................1WMF-Combination-S-VP-LST-230V-4-8kW ...........................................1WMF_Combination_F_2_mal_Netz_Schiff_440V ...................................1

6.2 Drawings Chocolate dispenser .....................................................................2Machine drawing chocolate dispenser........................................................2Machine drawing chocolate dispenser ship version ...................................2Piping diagram, chocolate dispenser ..........................................................2Wiring diagram chocolate dispenser .........................................................2

6.3 Drawing Accounting .....................................................................................2cN wiring diagram, coin checker................................................................2cN wiring diagram, coin changer with enabling contact ............................2cN wiring diagram, coin changer MDB .....................................................2cN wiring diagram, card reader 8-Preis......................................................2cN wiring diagram, card reader MDB........................................................2

Part 7 - Spare parts list 1Spare parts list for combiNation F 1

Part 8 - Operating instructions 1Operating instructions combiNation F 1

Part 10 - Index 1

Page 17: Training Manual CombiNationF

8/0 Operatin instructions

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS 8/0-1

Part 8 - Operating instructions

Operating instructions combiNation F

8

Page 18: Training Manual CombiNationF

Appendix

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

8/0-2

Page 19: Training Manual CombiNationF

73

WMF COFFEE MACHINES

Operating instructions

WMF combiNation F/ F2

Series 8700

Edition 6 - Printed in 03.08 Item-No.

33 0914 3000

Page 20: Training Manual CombiNationF

74

Congratulations on your purchase of a WMF COFFEE MACHINE. Its advanced technology, long service life, economy and above all, the quality of the coffee will delight you. Are you one of those people who don’t like reading operating instructions? Please do so anyway! You will get more pleasure from your WMF COFFEE MACHINE afterwards and will find it was worth it after all. In your own interest, please follow all safety and cautionary instructions. This will help to avoid accidents and technical malfunctions. Never entrust the machine to anyone who is not familiar with the operating instructions. Keep these operating instructions near the machine. This will allow your operating personnel easy access to information at any time and will enable them to take the appropriate action should any technical malfunctions occur.

Page 21: Training Manual CombiNationF

75

Contents

1 Designation of machine parts........................................................................................................... 78

2 General description........................................................................................................................... 79

3 Warnings............................................................................................................................................ 80

4 Safety instructions............................................................................................................................. 81

5 Technical data ................................................................................................................................... 83

6 Conditions of use and installation.................................................................................................... 84

7 Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 85 7.1 Starting the machine .................................................................................................................... 85

7.1.1 Switching on manually...................................................................................................... 85 7.1.2 Switching on via the timer ................................................................................................ 86 7.1.3 Switching on via display (adjustments to be made by the service team).......................... 86

7.2 Filling the ground coffee hopper ................................................................................................. 86 7.3 Beverage key selection and labelling .......................................................................................... 86 7.4 Adjusting the height of the front panel (optional) ....................................................................... 87 7.5 Selection of quantity of coffee for storage .................................................................................. 89

7.5.1 Automatic quantity control ............................................................................................... 90 7.5.2 Manual quantity control .................................................................................................... 92 7.5.3 Quantity control using the timer ....................................................................................... 93

7.6 Coffee dispensing (cup/mug/pot/jug) .......................................................................................... 93 7.7 Coffee and hot water dispensing ................................................................................................. 94 7.8 Switching off the machine........................................................................................................... 95

7.8.1 Switching off manually ..................................................................................................... 95 7.8.2 Switching off via the timer................................................................................................ 95 7.8.3 Switching off via display (adjustments to be made by the service team) ......................... 95

8 User guide .......................................................................................................................................... 95 8.1 General symbols .......................................................................................................................... 96 8.2 Info .............................................................................................................................................. 97 8.3 Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 98

8.3.1 Setting quantities............................................................................................................... 98 8.3.2 Beverage selection ............................................................................................................ 99 8.3.3 Quantity of ground coffee ............................................................................................... 100 8.3.4 Boiler temperature........................................................................................................... 100 8.3.5 Mode (self-service) ......................................................................................................... 101 8.3.6 Setting the date and time................................................................................................. 101

8.4 Access authorisations (PIN code).............................................................................................. 103 8.4.1 System of access authorisations ...................................................................................... 103 8.4.2 Changing access authorisations (PIN numbers).............................................................. 104

8.5 Unit number accounting ............................................................................................................ 106 8.6 Manual dispensing..................................................................................................................... 106 8.7 Waiter accounting system.......................................................................................................... 108 8.8 Vending units............................................................................................................................. 109

8.8.1 Coin checker / token checker .......................................................................................... 109 8.8.2 (Chip) card reader ........................................................................................................... 112 8.8.3 Coin changer ................................................................................................................... 113

9 Specific Supplement: WMF combiNation F2............................................................................... 117

Page 22: Training Manual CombiNationF

76

9.1 General description of the functions ..........................................................................................117 9.2 Technical data ............................................................................................................................118 9.3 Selection of storage quantity......................................................................................................119

10 Timer functions................................................................................................................................120 10.1 Timer settings.............................................................................................................................121

10.1.1 Setting the operating times ..............................................................................................121 10.1.2 Setting coffee quantities to be prepared...........................................................................124 10.1.3 Setting the machine cleaning times .................................................................................126 10.1.4 Setting switch-over to self-service mode.........................................................................127

10.2 Timer check................................................................................................................................129 10.3 Making changes to the timer ......................................................................................................131

10.3.1 Copying the timer ............................................................................................................131 10.3.2 Clearing the timer ............................................................................................................132

10.4 Timer information ......................................................................................................................133

11 Care of the machine.........................................................................................................................134 11.1 Cleaning the machine.................................................................................................................135

11.1.1 Fully automatic cleaning (using automatic granulate cleaning) .....................................135 11.1.2 Semi-automatic cleaning (via the manual input) ............................................................138

11.2 Cleaning using the timer ............................................................................................................139

12 Error messages / remedial action ...................................................................................................140

13 WMF customer service....................................................................................................................142

14 Liability.............................................................................................................................................142

Page 23: Training Manual CombiNationF

77

1

2

3

4

5

7

6 11

8

9

10

12

13

14

Page 24: Training Manual CombiNationF

78

1 Designation of machine parts

1 Ground coffee hopper

2 Coffee storage urn

3 Granulate cleaning reservoir

4 Touch screen display

5 Control panel

6 Coffee spout

7 Drip tray

8 Input (cover)

9 On/off key switch

10 Hot water key

11 Hot water spout

12 Height-adjustable front panel (optional)

13 Beverage keys

14 Waiter’s lock (optional)

Page 25: Training Manual CombiNationF

79

2 General description The WMF combiNation F is a coffee machine for automatic preparation of filter coffee and hot water. Cups, mugs, pots and jugs can be dispensed. The brewer unit enables 1 and 2 litres of coffee to be prepared. Each fresh brew is transferred to a storage urn, where it is kept hot ready for dispensing. The (optional) height-adjustable front panel enables jugs up to a height of 280 mm to be filled without any difficulty. The machine user guide is a graphic touch screen display. By pressing on particular soft keys in the display, you can activate certain machine functions or call up information.

Page 26: Training Manual CombiNationF

80

3 Warnings

Maximum machine safety is an integral WMF product characteristic to which we pay particular attention.

In spite of all our safety precautions, every machine is potentially hazardous if not operated properly. This is why – for your own safety – we have summarised the warnings below and highlighted them in grey throughout the instruction manual. This is why it is important to follow the “Safety instructions” given on page 81.

Important instructions which must be observed for your own safety

Connection and commissioning of the coffee machine may only be undertaken by the WMF customer service team.

Maintenance and repair work on the machine may only be undertaken by the WMF customer service team using original spare parts.

Installed safety devices must not be altered for any reason. No parts of the outside of the machine should be removed.

Caution! Risk of being burned and scalded At the spout where hot water 11 and coffee 6 comes out there is a risk of being burned and scalded. Always ensure that there is container placed under the drinks spout! Ensure that the container is stable and do not leave it unattended. After switching on it is possible that hot water comes out of the hot water- 11 and coffee spout 6 during the warm brewing phase. Never reach under the spouts while cleaning is in progress.

Caution! Health hazard! Follow the precautions on the packaging when using the cleaning product. The cleaning granulate is an irritant. Cleaning fluid flows out of the coffee spout 6 while cleaning is in progress. The protective panel provided should be fitted (see picture on page 136). Do not leave jugs or cups underneath the coffee spout 6 while cleaning is taking place. Wait until prompted by the display before placing cleaner granulate in the brewer.

Caution! Danger of crushing! Never put your hand into the ground coffee hopper 1 or the granulate cleaner reservoir 3 when the machine is in use and the power is switched on!

Caution! Electric shock hazard! Moisture can cause short circuits. It is therefore essential not to allow fluids to enter the inside of the machine housing . Under no circumstances should the machine be opened up. Never put your hand inside the machine interior or reach inside with a tool.

Page 27: Training Manual CombiNationF

81

4 Safety instructions 1 Always ensure that the main water tap in the supply line is closed when the machine is

switched off and that the main power switch outside the machine is off or the mains plug is disconnected from the socket as there is a risk of water escaping from the machine.

2 The installed component approved safety equipment prevents an impermissibly high pressure

or temperature increase in the hot water boiler. If the safety valve is actuated one-time then the machine must be switched off at the local main switch and the main stop cock on the drinking water supply line closed. Switch off the machine if any faults arise on the hot water boiler. Inform the WMF customer service team and do not switch on the machine again before the fault has been removed.

3 Do not use the machine in the open air. The water system must be emptied if there is frost. 4 The device must not be sprayed with a water hose. Use of steam cleaning, steam jet devices

and similar equipment for cleaning purposes is not permitted. Clean the surface of the coffee machine using a soft cloth or by using products from our WMF care range.

5 The device must be set on a flat, level and secure surface. 6 Do not let children near the machine! 7 Do not use the machine if it does not work properly or if has been damaged Shutting down the machine – company holidays 1 If the machine is to be shut down for an extended period, a general cleaning should be carried

out first and the grouts collector should be emptied. Drain the machine first to prevent frost damage if there is any risk of freezing. A WMF Customer Service Technician must be called promptly in such cases.

2 After several weeks of shutdown for holidays, we recommend that the full automatic cleaning

program be run at least twice before the machine is started up again. Regulations Refer to rating plate for boiler data. The hot water boiler complies with the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, Category 1, Module A. The hot water boiler is subject to neither notification nor licensing. Each hot water boiler is subjected to hydrostatic tests before delivery to the customer. The operator of such plants must ensure that the safety devices are carely serviced and inspected.

Page 28: Training Manual CombiNationF

82

The machine complies with all the relevant regulations. The operator must ensure that the electrical equipment and systems are in safe working order, (e.g. BGV A3). This device is subject of the directive on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE/EU directive) and may not be disposed of as domestic waste. Please contact your WMF Customer Service for information on proper disposal of the device. Preventative measures against suffering damage to the machine • There are always operating dangers associated with every technical device, particularly from

large fully automatic machines which are operating unobserved.

• We therefore recommend that the operator take reasonable measures to prevent damage occurring to the machine, for example by installing a suitable water hydrant in the drinking water supply on-site.

• If the water used in the machine has a carbonate hardness above 9°, a WMF water filter must be fitted in the supply line. Otherwise limescale can cause damage to the machine.

• Maintenance intervals depend on how heavily the machine is used and on local water conditions, and should be fixed by agreement with your WMF Customer Service Technician. Even in the case of light use, maintenance should be carried out at least once a year and the water filter, if fitted, should be replaced.

Page 29: Training Manual CombiNationF

83

5 Technical data

Rated power * 9.3 kW 13.8 kW

Hourly output ** Filter coffee

430 cups

500 cups

Storage urn 4.0 litres each

Hot water output, total 72 l/h 108 l/h

Ground coffee hopper Granulate cleaning portioner

2.2 kg 1.0 kg

Electricity supply * 3/N/PE 50 Hz/400 V

External dimensions: Width, single-product machine Width, two-product machine Height with ground coffee hopper Depth

450 mm 700 mm 810 mm 590 mm

Empty weight:

Single-product machine Two-product machine

Approx. 68 kg Approx. 98 kg

Continuous sound pressure level (Lpa)*** < 70 dB (A)

Heat emission Stand-by Full load *

200 W 9150 W

200 W

13650 W Technical data subject to change without notice. * Values quoted apply to basic version. For special versions, see rating plate. ** The hourly outputs indicated are GUIDELINES and depend, among other things, on the quantity of ground

coffee, coffee product, brewing temperature, brewing aperture size, brewing pressure, water hardness and general condition of the machine (e.g. limescale, connections, power, water, sequence, wear, etc.)

*** The A-weighted mean sound pressure level Lpa (slow) and Lpa (impulse) at the operator’s workplace is below 70 dB(A) in every operating mode.

Page 30: Training Manual CombiNationF

84

6 Conditions of use and installation

The machine operator must arrange for the site preparatory work. This should be carried out by approved contractors in accordance with general and local regulations. WMF customer service technicians are only permitted to connect the machine to the prepared connections. They are not authorised to carry out plumbing or wiring work on site and will not be responsible for such work.

Rated power 9.3 kW 13.8 kW

Connecting cable, site supply * 5 × 2.52 5 × 4²

Fuse, site supply 3 × 16 A 3 × 25 A

Mains voltage tolerance 230 V/400 V + 6 % - 10 % Power cut < 50 ms does not affect machine operation

Water feed line TW15 (DN 15 /1/2") with dirt filter installed by customer, min. 0,2 MPa flow pressure at 8 l/min, max. 0,6 MPa

Water quality If the local water has a carbonate hardness over 9°, a WMF water filter must be fitted in the supply line.

Water drain line Min. DN 40 (1 ½"), minimum gradient 2 cm/m

Ambient temperature + 5°C to + 35°C (drain water system in case of frost) Max. humidity Protection

80 % rel. humidity without dewing; do not spray machine with water; do not use machine out of doors.

IP 30

Installation clearance

For operating, service and safety reasons the machine should be installed with clearance of not less than 50 mm from the back and sides from the building or non-WMF components. A clear height of 1100 mm from the top of the supporting surface should be ensured. The height of the supporting surface from the floor surface should be not less than 700 mm and not more than 900 mm. If the machine connections are to be routed down through the counter, remember also to allow space for the connections. These may restrict the available space below the machine.

Water filter installation dimensions W × H × D

Standard: 250 × 500 × 400 mm Jumbo: 290 × 670 × 420 mm

* The site electrical system must comply with IEC 364. For greater safety, an earth leakage circuit breaker with a rated fault current of 30 mA to EN 61008 should be fitted in the supply line to the machine. In the vicinity of the machine, for a single-phase connection a shockproof socket and for a three-phase connection a 5-pole CEE/CEKON socket to EN 60309 should be fitted. If the power lead to this machine is damaged, it must be replaced by WMF customer service or a similarly qualified specialist. If the machine is permanently connected on site, an all-pole circuit breaker (main switch) to EN 60947 with not less than 3 mm contact opening should preferably be fitted ahead of the machine. In the case of a flexible connection, the circuit breaker is recommended. The power lead must not be allowed to come into contact with hot components. The main switch and socket are part of the customer’s system. The machine must not be installed with a fixed site connection if used with a trolley (mobile station).

Page 31: Training Manual CombiNationF

85

7 Operation

7.1 Starting the machine Before the machine is started up, the main shutoff valve in the fresh water feed line must be opened and the main electrical switch supplying the machine must be turned on. 7.1.1 Switching on manually Turn the key switch 9 to position “1” (On).

After switching on, the machine heats up to operating temperature (about 5 minutes). The first time a quantity of coffee is selected for storage (see chapter 7.5 on page 89), a hot rinse program is executed.

Caution! There is a danger of burning and scalding in the

hot water 11 and coffee 6 dispensing area. During the heating-up phase, the display shows the following:

When the machine has warmed up, the display shows the following: Coffee cannot be dispensed at this stage. First of all, the ground coffee hopper has to be filled (see chapter 7.2 on page 86) and a quantity of coffee selected for storage (see chapter 7.5 on page 89) before the machine is ready for operation. Fresh coffee is then brewed into the storage urn, ready for dispensing.

In the case of coffee machines for self-service use (see chapter 8.3.5 on page 101), when the machine has warmed up, the display shows the following: Coffee cannot be dispensed at this stage.

First of all, the ground coffee hopper has to be filled (see chapter 7.2 on page 86) and a quantity of coffee selected for storage (see chapter 7.5 on page 89) before the machine is ready for operation. Fresh coffee is then brewed into the storage urn, ready for dispensing.

9

Page 32: Training Manual CombiNationF

86

7.1.2 Switching on via the timer The coffee machine can be switched on automatically via the “Timer” function in the machine selection menu. Times are assigned to the day of the week and are not controlled by the date. For settings, refer to chapter 10 Timer functions on page 120.

7.1.3 Switching on via display (adjustments to be made by the service team) By touching the Standby Display (WMF-Logo) the switch-on soft key appears. The coffee machine now can be switched on by touching the soft key . If you have allocated access authorisations (PIN numbers) (see chapter 8.4 on page 103) you will be asked for your PIN number.

7.2 Filling the ground coffee hopper To fill the ground coffee hopper 1 remove the hopper lid and fill the hopper with ground coffee. Then replace the lid to close the hopper. The ground coffee hopper 1 has a capacity of approx. 2.2 kg.

Note: It is important to top up the ground coffee hopper before it is completely empty, to ensure correct operation of the coffee machine.

7.3 Beverage key selection and labelling A total of 4 beverage keys 13 and one hot water key 10 are at your disposal (see chapter 7.7 on page 94). You can assign each beverage key individually with your chosen coffee beverages. You will find a master for labelling the beverage keys on our Web site at www.wmf.de. You can use it to design your own labels and print them out on transparencies.

1

Page 33: Training Manual CombiNationF

87

Note: We recommend switching off the machine when changing the labels, to prevent a beverage key being pressed in error. Otherwise, there is a danger of burning and scalding.

You can label the beverage keys 13 as you choose. To do this, press on either the left-hand or right-hand side of the key strip and, while still pressing, slide the key strip out sideways until the key strip comes out of its holder.

Remove the key strip from its holder.

You can now replace the existing labels with labels which you have made yourself. You can print your own labels on plastic, cut to size and insert in place.

After changing the plastic labels, replace the key strip. To do this, insert the key strip into the holder, pressing evenly on both sides of the key strip until it clicks into position into the holder.

7.4 Adjusting the height of the front panel (optional)

Note: Front panel height adjustment is only available as an option. When you dispense a cup, pot or mug of coffee, the front panel 12 remains fully down all the way to the stop. The key lights in the Cup, Pot and Mug beverage keys are lit, and the key light for Jugs is extinguished. To fill jugs and containers over 140 mm high, the complete front panel 12 has to be pushed fully up all the way to the top. The key lights in the Jug and Hot water 10 beverage keys are lit, and the key lights for Cup, Pot and Mug are extinguished.

13

12

610

Page 34: Training Manual CombiNationF

88

Caution! There is a danger of burning and scalding in the

hot water 11 and coffee 6 dispensing area.

Grasp the lower part of the front panel and slide it all the way up to the top, using gentle pressure. This enables the clear height to be increased to 280 mm. In addition, the coffee spout 6 can be removed (for instance, to fill insulated jugs) but this is not possible in the case of self-service machines.

Caution! The coffee spout 6 and the hot water spout 11 are hot. There is a danger of burning. Beware in the coffee 6 and hot water 11 dispensing area: there is a danger of scalding.

Important: For safety reasons, it is not possible to dispense a cup, pot or mug of coffee when the front panel is in the raised position.

The corresponding keys are disabled. On sliding the front panel back to the fully down position, the keys are enabled again.

Page 35: Training Manual CombiNationF

89

7.5 Selection of quantity of coffee for storage Due to the design of the machine, a quantity for storage has to be selected before coffee can be brewed and dispensed. The brewer unit in the WMF combiNation F allows brew quantities of 1 and 2 litres of coffee to be prepared. One or more brews are carried out until the urn contains the desired quantity. The following actions are shown on the display: Storage urn emptying Storage urn flushing taking place Brewing taking place (see display on the right) By pressing the soft key you can access a second level, where there is a selection menu. The following display appears: Now press the soft key to select a quantity of coffee to be prepared. You can also go directly into the quantity of coffee selection by pressing on the storage urn. The following quantity preselections are available and can be selected by means of the soft keys:

Page 36: Training Manual CombiNationF

90

7.5.1 Automatic quantity control

There is a choice of 3 alternatives: Half full, Full (economy) and Full (power)

- Half full Two litres of coffee are transferred to the storage urn to begin with. If the coffee level in the urn falls below 1.5 litres, the WMF combiNation F starts automatic refill brewing of fresh coffee (1 litre). Should the coffee level fall below 1.0 litre, coffee dispensing is disabled. No more coffee will be dispensed until refill brewing of fresh coffee has taken place. Press to confirm your selection.

If you choose “Half full” as the quantity preselection, instead of the empty storage urn, the display shows:

If coffee has already been brewed into the storage urn, the display shows the current level in the urn. In this example, the urn contains 1.6 litres of coffee:

Note: The display of the actual contents of the storage urn

has a display tolerance of up to 0.3 litres. The quantity of coffee currently stored in the urn is displayed in litres in every quantity preselection stage (except for coffee machines in self-service operation mode, see chapter 8.3.5 on page 101).

Page 37: Training Manual CombiNationF

91

- Full (power)

Four litres of coffee are transferred to the storage urn to begin with. If the coffee level in the urn falls below 2.1 litres, the WMF combiNation F starts automatic refill brewing of fresh coffee (2 litres).

Note:

Should the coffee level fall below 1.0 litre, coffee dispensing is disabled.

No more coffee will be dispensed until refill brewing of fresh coffee has taken place. Press . to confirm your selection.

If you choose “Full (power)” as the quantity preselection, instead of the empty storage urn, the display shows:

- Full - economy This is the same version (see “Full power”) with a lower hourly output and more economical use of the ground coffee. Press . to confirm your selection.

If you choose “Full - economy” as the quantity preselection, instead of the empty storage urn, the display shows:

Note: Coffee dispensing is briefly disabled during refill brewing.

Page 38: Training Manual CombiNationF

92

7.5.2 Manual quantity control

- 1 litre manual One litre of coffee is transferred to the storage urn to begin with. If the coffee level in the urn falls below 0.5 litres, coffee dispensing is disabled. Automatic refill brewing does not take place. In other words, each brew has to be started.

Note:

Coffee dispensing is disabled during brewing. The rest of the coffee can then be removed manually (see chapter 8.6 on page 106). Press . to confirm your selection.

If you choose “1 litre manual” as the quantity preselection, instead of the empty storage urn, the display shows:

- High-speed brewing (adjustments to be made by the service team) Brewing of the maximum possible quantity can be activated manually via the display, if required. This setting is activated until touching the soft key again. Important: the quantity preselection must be preset to an automatic setting. Brewing will start again automatically just as soon as at least 1 litre of coffee can be removed.

- Stand-by (zero litres)

This setting should be selected if you want to empty the storage urn completely and no refill brewing is required. Coffee stored in the urn is dispensed until dispensing is disabled on reaching 0.5 litres. Press to confirm your selection.

If you choose “Stand-by (zero litres)” as the quantity

preselection, instead of the empty storage urn, the display shows:

Page 39: Training Manual CombiNationF

93

7.5.3 Quantity control using the timer You can program different quantities for brewing and storage at different times as required, by using the Timer function in the machine selection menu. Times are assigned to the day of the week and are not controlled by the date. For the settings, refer to chapter 10 on page 120.

7.6 Coffee dispensing (cup/mug/pot/jug) Once the ground coffee hopper has been filled (see chapter 7.2 on page 86), the desired storage quantity has been selected (see chapter 7.5 on page 89) and a brew has already taken place and the coffee is in the storage urn 2, the machine is operational and coffee can be dispensed by pressing a beverage key. The display shows the empty storage urn or the symbol for the storage quantity you have selected (see chapter 7.5 on page 89): If there is no coffee in the storage urn 2 but, the following message is displayed:

Caution!

There is a danger of burning and scalding in the area of the coffee spout 6.

Page 40: Training Manual CombiNationF

94

Example: Dispensing a cup of coffee

1. Place a cup under the coffee spout 6.

2. Press the beverage key labelled Cup on the control panel 5.

3. While dispensing is taking place, the green LED (key ring) for the beverage key you have pressed flashes. The other key lights (rings) are extinguished.

4. When the dispensing process has been completed, the machine is ready again for dispensing.

Each cup, mug, pot or jug of coffee is dispensed from the storage urn.

7.7 Coffee and hot water dispensing When the machine is operational, coffee or hot water can be dispensed by pressing one of the beverage keys 13 or the hot water key 10.

Caution! There is a danger of burning and scalding in the area of the coffee spout 6 and the hot water spout 11.

Coffee or hot water can be dispensed in three different ways via the coffee spout 6 and the hot water spout 11:

4. Measured dispensing Press one of the beverage keys 13 or the hot water key 10 to start dispensing coffee or hot water. Dispensing stops automatically when a pre-defined quantity has been dispensed (see chapter 8.3.1 on page 98).

5. Start-Stop function Press one of the beverage keys 13 or the hot water key

10 to start dispensing coffee or hot water. Press again to stop.

6. Free flow Coffee or hot water dispensing continues as long as the

beverage key 13 or the hot water key 10 is pressed. Your WMF customer service engineer will set your preferred alternative for you as required.

10

11

13

6

Page 41: Training Manual CombiNationF

95

7.8 Switching off the machine

Important! Daily cleaning must be carried out before switching

off the machine (see chapter 11.1, Cleaning the machine, on page 135).

7.8.1 Switching off manually

Turn the key switch 9 to position “0” (Off).

Important! After switching off the machine, the main shutoff

valve on the water inlet must be closed and the main power switch to which the machine is connected must be switched off.

7.8.2 Switching off via the timer The coffee machine can be switched off automatically via the Timer function in the machine selection menu. Times are assigned to the day of the week and are not controlled by the date. For the settings, refer to chapter 10 Timer functions on page 120.

7.8.3 Switching off via display (adjustments to be made by the service team) The coffee machine can be switched off via display by pressing the soft key in the main menue. The soft key must be pressed for at least 1.5 sec. If you have allocated access authorisations (PIN numbers) (see chapter 8.4 on page 103) you will be asked for your PIN number after pressing the soft key . Required authorisation: cleaning.

8 User guide The machine user guide is provided in the form of a touch screen display 4. When the machine is ready for operation, the following display is shown, or the display for the storage setting selected (in this example, the “Half full setting” with 1.8 litres of coffee in the storage urn):

9

Page 42: Training Manual CombiNationF

96

However this does not apply to your coffee machine in self-service mode. In this case, instead of the storage urn, the display shows a large cup (see chapter 8.3.5 on page 101).

Pressing on the blank area of the display will produce the additional symbol , which can be used to call up user information about the machine, etc. The symbol additionally appears if a malfunction has occurred.

Pressing the soft key takes you into a second level, where a selection menu is available. If you have allocated access authorisations (PIN numbers) (see chapter 8.4 on page 103), on pressing the soft key you will be asked for your PIN number. Key in your PIN number. When the correct PIN number is entered, the selection menu is displayed.

This selection menu allows you to set or alter various settings, depending on your access authorisations. The individual menu items are explained step by step in the following chapters:

Quantity storage (see chapter 7.5 on page 89 )

Cleaning (see chapter 11 on page 134)

Managing access rights (PIN number) (see chapter 8.4 on page 103)

Settings (see chapter 8.3 on page 98 )

Allocation of access authorisations (PIN code) (see chapter 8.4 on page 103)

Unit number accounting (see chapter 8.5 on page 106)

Manual dispensing (see chapter 8.6 on page 106)

Timer functions (see chapter 10 on page 120)

8.1 General symbols For general menu control, the following symbols are used with the following meanings:

Confirm or start a step or store settings

Page 43: Training Manual CombiNationF

97

Back to a previous menu level or quit without saving (exit)

Context-sensitive help or additional information Clear symbol Increase or reduce settings

Go to beginning or end of list

Scroll up or down one page of list Scroll back or forwards through dialogues with several pages

8.2 Info

Push the soft key on the display “Ready to operate“ to call up the menu Information.

The main menu Information offers the following selection options: Service • Service centre • Next servicing date • Software version Costumer Care • Journal

Journal on the last cleaning operation • Info. about cleaning

Info. about the last cleaning • Info. about descaling

Info. about the last/next descaling • Info. about the water softener (optional)

Info about the remaining operating life Brewtime • Brewtime of the last beverage delivered or last

brewing

Journal • Directory of recorded errors and messages

(for providing support by telephone)

Timer • Info about status of timer (On/Off) • Info about next switching time.

Page 44: Training Manual CombiNationF

98

8.3 Settings The machine is ready for operation and the following display is shown, or the display for the storage setting selected: By pressing the soft key you can access a second level, where there is a selection menu in which settings can be made.

If you would like to change the settings for your coffee beverages, press the soft key in the selection menu.

In the menu that follows, you are asked to choose whether you want to alter beverage settings, machine settings, the First run up, timer program, the date/time or the contrast.

8.3.1 Setting quantities

To alter the quantity of coffee or hot water for your beverages, in the “Settings” menu: Start by pressing the Beverages soft key.

The following display appears:

Now select the beverage key 13 on the control panel 5 for the beverage that you would like to change.

You are now in the setting mode for the beverage selected (in this example, cup of coffee). You can now alter the quantity of coffee or hot water. Press the soft key to alter the quantity.

Page 45: Training Manual CombiNationF

99

The following display appears: Press the or soft keys to alter the quantity starting from the current setting. The change is displayed both graphically and as a percentage.

By pressing the soft key at any time during setting, you can activate test dispensing to check the selected setting. The following display appears: Press the cup coffee soft key to start test dispensing. If there is no coffee in the storage urn, the following message is displayed:

Press the soft key to accept the new settings, or press

to quit the setting menu without accepting the changes.

Press the soft key to scroll to the next settings page. 8.3.2 Beverage selection To set or alter beverage allocation to a beverage key on the control panel, press the Beverage soft key.

The following display appears. This list contains standard beverage settings, which you can allocate to the individual beverage keys.

Important note:

When you alter the beverage selection, the individual settings are overwritten by the default values for the beverage selected (factory settings).

If you only want to alter the settings for a beverage key that has already been allocated, skip this setting step.

Page 46: Training Manual CombiNationF

100

If you want to allocate a new beverage name to a beverage key on the control panel, press the description of your desired beverage on the list soft key.

In the example shown here, the beverage selected was

“Cup coffee”. Press to quit the setting menu without accepting the changes.

8.3.3 Quantity of ground coffee To alter the quantity of ground coffee for your beverages, in the “Settings” menu: Start by pressing the Machine soft key.

The following display appears:

Press the Coffeepowder soft key. The following display appears: Next, select the brewing quantity for which you wish to set the quantity of ground coffee, for example 1 Litre . Settings can be made for the following brewing batches: 1 litre for the setting Half-full and Manual 1 litre 2 litres ECO for the setting Full ECO 2 litres for the setting Full

The following display appears: Press the or soft keys to alter the quantity of ground coffee, starting from the current setting. The change is displayed both graphically and as a percentage. It is only possible to make small changes to quantities. Bigger changes can only be made by WMF customer service.

8.3.4 Boiler temperature To alter the boiler temperature, in the “Settings / machine” menu: Start by pressing the Temperature soft key.

Page 47: Training Manual CombiNationF

101

The following display appears: Press the or soft keys to alter the boiler temperature, starting from the current setting. The change is displayed both graphically and as a percentage. Maximum deviations of approx. + 2% / - 3% can be set. Bigger changes can only be made by WMF customer service.

8.3.5 Mode (self-service)

To change the mode of operation of your coffee machine, in the “Settings / machine” menu: Start by pressing the OperatingMode soft key.

The following display appears: If you would like to operate your coffee machine as a self-service machine, press the SelfServ.Mode soft key. If we want the coffee machine to run in self-service mode but still have the storage urn with its contents shown, press on soft key SS+StC Display. Note: Settings can then no longer be altered by pressing in the storage urn. Changes in this case must be made via the selection menu and storage stages.

In the following display, you are asked to press to confirm your choice.

In self-service mode, the following display then appears immediately, in place of the empty storage urn:

8.3.6 Setting the date and time

The machine is ready for operation and the following display is shown, or the display for the storage setting selected: By pressing the soft key, you can access a second level, where there is a selection menu. Here you can set the date and time.

Page 48: Training Manual CombiNationF

102

If you have allocated access authorisations (PIN numbers) (see chapter 8.4 on page 103), on pressing the soft key you will be asked for your PIN number. Key in your PIN number. When the correct PIN number is entered, the selection menu is displayed.

To alter the date and time shown in the display, press the

soft key in the selection menu.

To alter the date and time, in the “Settings” menu: Start by pressing the Time / Date soft key.

In this menu, you can now alter the date (day, month, year, day of the week) and the time (hour, minute) individually by pressing the or soft keys as appropriate. Then press the soft key to confirm the new settings, or

press to quit the menu without accepting the changes.

Page 49: Training Manual CombiNationF

103

8.4 Access authorisations (PIN code) 8.4.1 System of access authorisations The access authorisation system featured in the WMF combiNation F restricts access to the selection menu, if desired. There are 3 levels of access authorisations:

Level 1 Cleaning

Setting the quantity of coffee to be stored, switching on / off via display and cleaning . The corresponding soft keys are available in the selection menu. The soft key is additionally displayed. This allows access rights to be extended by keying in the corresponding PIN number.

Level 2 Setting

Beverage settings , machine settings and setting the date/time . The corresponding soft keys are available in the selection menu. The soft key is additionally displayed. This allows access rights to be extended by keying in the corresponding PIN number.

Level 3 Accounting Access authorisations (PIN numbers) , unit

number accounting and manual dispensing . The corresponding soft keys are available

in the selection menu. The soft key is additionally displayed. This allows access rights to be extended by keying in the corresponding PIN number.

You can allocate your own PIN numbers for levels 1 to 3 (Cleaning, Setting, Accounting). The PIN numbers are hierarchical in structure. The PIN number for level 2, for instance, can also be valid for level 1, but not for level 3 (see chapter 8.4.2 on page 104).

Page 50: Training Manual CombiNationF

104

8.4.2 Changing access authorisations (PIN numbers) The machine is ready for operation and the following display is shown, or the display for the storage setting selected: Pressing the soft key takes you to a second level, where a selection menu allows you to change the access authorisations (PIN numbers).

If you have already allocated access authorisations (PIN numbers), on pressing the soft key you will be asked for your PIN number. Key in your PIN number. When the correct PIN number is entered, the selection menu is displayed. If access authorisations (PIN numbers) has not been allocated, the request for the PIN number is skipped and you enter the selection menu straight away.

If you are authorised to alter or manage the access authorisations (PIN numbers), the following selection menu will appear, including the soft key. If you do not have that authorisation, the soft key will not appear.

On pressing the soft key, the access control menu appears, showing the PIN numbers currently set for levels 1 to 3 (Cleaning, Setting, Accounting). In the example shown here, the number is 0000 in each case.

You can allocate your own PIN numbers for levels 1 to 3 (Cleaning, Setting, Accounting). If you wish to change the PIN number for level 1, press the Cleaning soft key in the access control menu. The following display will appear, in which you can key in the new PIN number. The number keyed in will be displayed in clear. You can correct the captured number, one digit at a time, by pressing the soft key. Then press the soft key to accept the new

settings, or press to quit the menu without accepting the changes.

Page 51: Training Manual CombiNationF

105

For example, if you have chosen the PIN number 1234 for level 1 Cleaning the following display will appear if no PIN number has been allocated yet for the higher levels 2 and 3. The PIN number for the lower levels is therefore used for the higher levels. In the example shown here, the PIN number 1234 has also been used for level 2 Setting and level 3 Accounting. If the PIN number for one level is cleared by keying in the PIN number 0000, the PIN numbers for the lower levels will also be cleared. If the PIN number 0000 is allocated, no PIN number is requested for the corresponding level and access is unrestricted (as a rule, level 1 Cleaning).

If you wish to change the PIN number for level 2, press the Setting soft key in the access control menu. The following display will appear, in which you can key in the new PIN number. The number keyed in will be displayed in clear. You can correct the number entered, one digit at a time, by pressing the soft key. Press the soft key to

accept the new settings, or press to quit the menu without accepting the changes.

For example, if the PIN number 9876 has been chosen for level 2 Setting the following display will appear if no PIN number has been allocated yet for the higher level 3.

If you wish to change the PIN number for level 3, press the Accounting soft key in the access control menu. The following display will appear, in which you can key in the new PIN number. The number keyed in will be displayed in clear. You can correct the number entered, one digit at a time, by pressing the soft key. Then press the soft

key to accept the new settings, or press to quit the menu without accepting the changes.

For example, you can select the PIN number 7777 for level 3 Accounting.

Page 52: Training Manual CombiNationF

106

8.5 Unit number accounting In order to read off the unit numbers dispensed for each beverage, press the soft key in the selection menu.

The following display appears: You have the choice of reading off the daily counter. In this display, you can now select the beverage for which you wish to read off the daily counter. For example, press the Cup Urn1 soft key.

The following display appears, showing the precise number of cups of coffee dispensed that day (in this example, 4 cups of coffee): To reset the daily counter to zero, press the soft key.

You can also reset all daily counter to zero by pressing the

soft key in the general overview.

You can otherwise leave the menu with the key without having deleted the counter for all beverages.

8.6 Manual dispensing

Note: If your WMF combiNation F does not have a

height-adjustable front panel (optional), it is still possible to fill a jug of coffee, by using the manual dispensing mode. To do this, push the coffee spout cover up out of the way and pull the coffee spout down to remove it. A jug of coffee can now be dispensed with the aid of the multi-brew spout attachment (order no. 33 9838.3000). This does not apply to self service machines.

Page 53: Training Manual CombiNationF

107

You can use the manual dispensing option to dispense coffee from the storage urn in free flow mode.

Note:

The dispensed amount is not counted.

Caution! There is a danger of burning and scalding in the area of the coffee spout 6.

The following display appears: Press the Start soft key to start the draining process. The display shows you how many litres of coffee are currently in the storage urn.

Press the Stop soft key to stop the draining process at any time.

When all the coffee has been drained from the storage urn, the following display appears:

Page 54: Training Manual CombiNationF

108

8.7 Waiter accounting system Your WMF combiNation F can be fitted with a WMF Waiter Accounting System, in conjunction with the WMF Multicounter or in conjunction with an accounting system (e.g. WMF bar systems).

The coffee machine is equipped with a waiter lock 14 and connected to the accounting unit. Beverages are released by inserting authorised waiter keys and, if table numbers are in use, by inputting a table number in the machine display. Beverages dispensed for each waiter or table number are calculated via the external accounting system.

The following modes are available: Debit mode (waiter self-service):

The waiter inserts the authorised waiter key and, if appropriate, enters the table number in order to dispense beverages. If table numbers are in use, the following display appears upon inserting the waiter key:

The table number can now be entered in the display.

Always press OK to confirm the entry. If the table number is already in use by another waiter, the table will appear scored through in the display and beverage dispensing will be disabled:

Press the C key or remove and re-insert the waiter key to input another table number. Details of beverages dispensed, the table number (if in use) and waiter identification are reported to the accounting system.

Page 55: Training Manual CombiNationF

109

Credit mode: When working in Credit mode, a credit is indicated in respect of beverage dispensing from the WMF coffee machine. In other words, the waiter keys in the beverage sale information at the till. If the WMF coffee machine shows a credit for a beverage, the beverage can be dispensed either freely or by inserting the appropriate waiter key.

Note:

A credit is indicated by lighting up of the green key ring.

8.8 Vending units 8.8.1 Coin checker / token checker Using for the first time The WMF combiNation F can be equipped with a coin checker or token checker for self-service mode.

Note: The coin checker / token checker must only be connected and put into service by WMF Customer Service.

Switch on your WMF coffee machine. The coin checker is now automatically switched on. If the coffee beans hopper or ground coffee hopper is full, then the machine is ready for operation. However, the key lights in the individual beverage keys are not lit. The value of the programmed selling price first has to be inserted, before the key lights in the beverage keys released light up and coffee can be dispensed.

Note:

The coin checker does not give change in case of overpayment. Coins already collected are retained.

Page 56: Training Manual CombiNationF

110

The ‘manual dispensing’ softkey in the selection menu in the coffee machine display 4 allows the option of either releasing all the beverages or only dispensing a single beverage free, e.g. to dispense a jug of coffee.

Note: For security purposes, we strongly advise allocating an accounting PIN number to the Free key setting or to beverage release. (see chapter 8.4 Access authorisations on page 103)

To switch off the coin checker, press the Free key in the display to change over to free dispensing of all beverages. An alternative is to switch the tip switch in the attached housing to “free drinks”. Coins and/or tokens inserted into the coin checker (coin slot) are collected in the lockable coin box. The coin checker can be set to 2 different selling prices. If the coin checker fails to operate, press the orange coin return key. The coins or tokens can then be removed from the coin return. If beverage dispensing is disabled, for instance because machine cleaning is taking place, coin acceptance is disabled. Any coins inserted drop down through the return chute.

Note:

In the case of machine malfunction, for example if there is no water pressure or if machine cleaning is in progress, coin acceptance is disabled.

Note: In the case of malfunctions which effect brewing, such as an empty coffee beans hopper or ground coffee hopper, coins will still be accepted but beverage dispensing will not take place.

Note: In this case, please follow the instructions on your WMF coffee machine display.

Dimensions (body) Height Width Depth

600 mm 170 mm 498 mm

Page 57: Training Manual CombiNationF

111

Settings Once the coin checker has been commissioned by WMF Customer Service, you can program your own selling prices. This is done as follows: First, open the coin box and pull the coin checker housing towards you. On the left-hand side you can now access the dip switches, which you need in order to program the selling prices.

1. Set the dip switches as shown for Price 1 or Price 2:

Setting selling price 1

Setting selling price 2

2. Press the coin return key.

3. Insert coins from the set of coins to the total value of the selling price you want to set.

4. Press the coin return key again.

A selling price is now set. Repeat the procedure to set a second price it required. Then set all the dip switches to “OFF” again. Carry out some trial sales to check the price or the prices you have set.

Page 58: Training Manual CombiNationF

112

8.8.2 (Chip) card reader The WMF combiNation F can be equipped with a card reader for self-service mode.

The card reader is purchased by the customer and sent to WMF for fitting. The card reader manufacturer’s specific instructions should always be followed.

Switch on your WMF coffee machine. The card reader is now automatically switched on. The ‘manual dispensing’ softkey in the selection menu in the coffee machine display 4 allows the option of either releasing all the beverages or only dispensing a single beverage free, e.g. to dispense a jug of coffee.

Note: For security purposes, we strongly advise allocating an accounting PIN number to the Free key setting or to beverage release. (see chapter 8.4Access authorisations on page 103).

To switch off the card checker, press the Free key in the display to change over to free dispensing of all beverages. The card reader can be set up for a varying number of selling prices (depending on the card reader model).

Note: Depending on the card reader model, if a malfunction occurs, the cards may not be accepted. In this case, please follow the error messages in your WMF coffee machine display.

Dimensions (body) Height Width Depth

600 mm 170 mm 498 mm

Page 59: Training Manual CombiNationF

113

8.8.3 Coin changer Starting up

Note: The coin changer must only be connected and put into service by WMF Customer Service.

The WMF combiNation Fcan be fitted with a coin changer for self-service mode. The attachment described here is an MEI (Mars Electronics International) CF 7000 ®/TM coin changer with a MDB interface.

WMF Customer Service will set up the required beverages and beverage prices and instruct your operating personnel. You can make changes to the beverages or beverage prices yourself.

Note: If faults occur that you cannot correct yourself, call WMF Customer Service. Do not switch the machine on again until the fault has been remedied.

Rated voltage 230 V Dimensions Height Width Depth

655 mm 190 mm 450 mm

Weight approx. 20 kg The ‘manual dispensing’ softkey in the selection menu in the coffee machine display 4 allows the option of either releasing all the beverages or only dispensing a single beverage free, e.g. to dispense a jug of coffee.

Note:

For security purposes, we strongly advise allocating an accounting PIN number to the Free key setting or to beverage release. (see chapter 8.4 Access authorisations on page 103).

If the coin changer is switched off at the On/Off switch, all the beverages can also be dispensed free.

Page 60: Training Manual CombiNationF

114

Settings • Filling the tubes with change

Press the yellow key and the “A” key on the coin changer and insert coins via the coin checker. The tubes are filled up to the preset level. Once the levels have been reached, any further coins will be rejected. After filling up, press the “A” key to return to normal mode.

Paying out coins /emptying tubes

On pressing the keys, one coin is paid out of the corresponding tube each time. If you press the “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E” key for longer than three seconds, the coins will be paid out automatically until only a minimum (the minimum reserve) is left. This minimum is sufficient to operate the pay-out mechanism. To empty a tube or box, you may need to remove the last few coins manually.

Automatic emptying to a preset level

If your coin changer is programmed for this function, press the keys “A”, “C”

to pay out coins until the levels in the tubes reach the preset levels. If the number of coins already in the tubes is the same as or less than the level, no coins will be paid out.

Setting the selling prices There is an input keypad in the coin changer housing. You can use this keypad to change the following items:

Keys: Display: PRINT /ABR Beverage Editor

Bev. No. 36 >> Enter number of beverages (e.g. on the combiNation S)

1 6 Beverage Editor Bev. No. 36 >>

ENTER Press key to confirm. Beverage Editor Bev. No. 16 >>

>> (only if a second machine is connected) Beverages Slave 1 Bev. No. 08 >>

>> Beverage number 01

Page 61: Training Manual CombiNationF

115

Price 9999.99 € Enter price of beverage 1 e.g. 1.50 €

0 0 0 1 5 0 Beverage number 01 Price 0001.50 €

Press the ENTER key to save the price input. Price 0000.00 means this beverage is dispensed free. Price 9999.99 means sales of this beverage are disabled.

If the beverage number is not known, the beverage number can be displayed by pressing the beverage key on the vending unit, whereby one can also change over at the same time to the beverage key whose price should be altered.

Beverage number 02 Price 9999.99 €

Enter the price of Beverage 2 and press ENTER once again to confirm. Repeat this procedure until all the prices have been input.

Caution! Use only the >> key to confirm the following displays. Do not make any changes to the settings, as this could cause the coin changer to malfunction. Any changes must be made by WMF Customer Service only.

>> Max. Credit MP[0] 00.00 € >>

>> Max. return MP[1] 00.00 € >>

>> Tube combination MP[2] 00 >>

>> Token value[00] 0.00 € >>

>> BDV6[00] Value 00000000 >>

Page 62: Training Manual CombiNationF

116

With the vending options, only the last two digits should be altered to your requirements.

1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 Vending Options 10010010 >>

If an additional machine is connected Slave Option 01

Slave mode >> ENTER EXIT

No change of money

Note: You can quit this procedure by pressing the “EXIT” key.

All the individual steps which you confirmed by pressing “ENTER” will be saved.

Machine cleaning

Caution! Turn off the power supply to the machine before cleaning the coin changer.

Please follow the manufacturer’s cleaning instructions when cleaning the coin changer. These instructions can be found in the enclosed Quick Reference sheet, where all the cleaning steps are described in detail.

= 0 means that change is given each time a product is dispensed.

= 1 means that several products can be dispensed until the value of the coins has been used up.

(multiple sales)

= 0 coins can be changed even without dispensing any products.

= 1 coin changer is only active after product dispensing.

(purchase compulsory)

Do not make any changes! Changes can lead to malfunction.

If no currency unit is shown in the display, set the second digit to 1.

= 1 means currency display in € (if currency display is set to “On”)

Page 63: Training Manual CombiNationF

117

9 Specific Supplement: WMF combiNation F2

Attention! These are supplements to the manual of the WMF combiNation F. The safety instructions mentioned in that manual are also valid for the combiNation F2. Please also consider all chapters of the manual for the combiNation F which are not specifically mentioned for the combiNation F2.

9.1 General description of the functions The combiNation F2 with its two big ground coffee hoppers, two 4 litre storage urns and two coffee spouts substitutes a second coffee machine and makes the brewing of a second type of filter coffee, e.g. decaffeinated coffee, possible.

1 2 ground coffee hoppers 2 2 storage urns

1 2

Page 64: Training Manual CombiNationF

118

9.2 Technical data

Rated power * 9,3 kW 13,8 kW

Hourly output ** with starting supply

430 cups 490 cups

500 cups 560 cups

2 Storage urns 4,0 litres each

Hot water output, total 72 l/h 108 l/h

2 Ground coffee hoppers 2,2 kg each

Electricity supply* 3/N/PE 50 Hz/400 V

External dimensions: Width, machine for two types of coffee Height with ground coffee hopper Depth

700 mm 810 mm 590 mm

Empty weight: Machine for two types of coffee approx. 98 kg Continuous sound pressure level (Lpa) *** < 70 dB (A) Heat emission Stand-by Full load *

200 W 9150 W

200 W

13650 W

Technical data subject to change without notice. * Values quoted apply to basic version. For special versions, see rating plate.

** The hourly outputs indicated are GUIDELINES and depend, among other things, on the quantity of ground

coffee, coffee beverage, brewing temperature, brewing aperture size, brewing pressure, water hardness and general condition of the machine (e.g. limescale, connections, power, water, sequence, wear, etc.)

*** The A-weighted mean sound pressure level Lpa (slow) and Lpa (impulse) at the operator’s workplace is below 70 dB(A) in every operating mode.

Page 65: Training Manual CombiNationF

119

9.3 Selection of storage quantity At the combiNation F2 you can choose between four automatic and two manual brewing programs (see chapter 7.5 Selection of storage quantity in the manual of the WMF combiNation F on page 89). Basically the setting and the operation of the quantity control is the same as with the combiNation F. The only difference is that two storage urns are shown in the display:

Characteristics: - Brewing of two types of coffee without any problem - Controlling of the two storage urns via the touch screen

display - The height of the front panel can only be adjusted on

the left hand side of the coffee machine - Dispensing of the second coffee type into jugs is only

possible with a multibrew spout which must be connected to the normal spout

- Direct filling of containers (jugs) with a height of maximum 198 mm with removed spout

- Mixing of the coffee types is not possible

Page 66: Training Manual CombiNationF

120

10 Timer functions The timer in your WMF combiNation F gives you total independence and flexibility. The timer takes over routine tasks such as

- Switching the machine on and off - Changes to the quantity of coffee prepared - Starting machine cleaning cycle - Switching over the machine to self-service mode

Up to 16 switching times each day can be programmed in.

The machine is ready for operation and the following display is shown, or the display for the storage setting selected: By pressing the soft key or by pressing directly on the empty urn symbol in the display, you can access a second level, where there is a selection menu that contains the Timer function.

To set the timer, or to alter previous timer settings, or to call up information about the timer, press the soft key in the selection menu.

The following display appears:

To activate the timer in your coffee machine, press the top soft key in the display, “Timer status OFF”. Confirm the

interim question by pressing the soft key. The soft key in the display will change to “Timer status ON” and the timer is now active. The machine will carry out your preset switching times and actions. Press the “Timer status ON” soft key again to deactivate the timer after repeated confirmation of the interim question.

Normally, a small black clock in the display indicates that the timer is active:

Page 67: Training Manual CombiNationF

121

10.1 Timer settings The following timer settings are available: - Operating times (switching the machine on and off) - Setting different quantities of coffee to be prepared - Carrying out automatic machine cleaning - Switch over the machine to self-service mode 10.1.1 Setting the operating times Press the soft key in the selection menu to set the timer on your coffee machine.

The following display appears: Then press the Timeradjustment soft key.

The following display screen appears: Press the Running Time soft key to program the switching-on and switching-off times.

In the menu that follows you can set the day, time and the action you want your coffee machine to carry out. The column heading “Day” refers to the days of the week. 1 is Monday, 2 is Tuesday, and so on. 1-5 refers to working days (Monday to Friday), 1-7 the whole week (Monday to Sunday).

If you touch the 1 soft key, all the days of the week will appear in the display in ordinary text, with the selected day highlighted in white. Now select the day for which you would like to program the timer by touching the desired day of the week in the display. For example, if you choose Wednesday, the number 3 . will appear in the display, under the column heading Day.

Page 68: Training Manual CombiNationF

122

Alternatively, you can use the Plus and Minus keys to select the days of the week. The time (hour/minute) can only be set by using the Plus and Minus keys.

Note: The timer is controlled by the date and time set on the coffee machine. It is therefore important to ensure that the date and time on your machine are correctly set. (see chapter 8.3.6 on page 101). Under the column heading “Action” you can select the various possible settings for your coffee machine. Touch the centre of the symbol panel to see all the options that can be set in Operating Time mode in clear text, with the function already selected highlighted in white:

In Operating Time mode, you can program: - Switching-on times - Switching-off times or - Switching-off times followed by cleaning.

To do this, touch the setting you want.

Page 69: Training Manual CombiNationF

123

This setting then appears as a symbol in the display:

switch on

switch off

cleaning + off Press the OK soft key to confirm your selection. A programmed switching time can be cleared again by pressing the C soft key (deletion visible in the indicator --‘--).

If you use the Plus (up arrow) and Minus (down arrow) keys in the “Action” column, after scrolling through the setting options in Operating Time mode, you will automatically move on to the setting options in other modes, such as Cleaning mode (see chapter 10.1.3 on page126), Preselection, (see chapter 10.1.2 on page 124) or Self-service mode (see chapter 10.1.4 on page 127). The column heading “Prg” denotes the 16 switching times that can be set for each day. Once you have pressed the OK soft key to confirm the desired action, all the programmed switching times will automatically be arranged in chronological order. By pressing the soft key in the display as a check, you can access the Timer Check directly (see chapter 10.2 Timer check on page 129).

Page 70: Training Manual CombiNationF

124

10.1.2 Setting coffee quantities to be prepared To set the timer on your coffee machine, press the soft key in the selection menu.

The following display appears: Then press the Timeradjustment soft key.

The following symbol appears in the display: Press the Preselection soft key to program different quantities of coffee to be prepared, as required.

In the following menu you can set the day, time (for an example, see chapter 10.1.1 Setting the operating times on page 121) and the desired action your coffee machine is to perform. Under the column heading “Action” you can select the various possible settings for your coffee machine.

Touch the centre of the symbol panel to see all the options that can be set in Preselection mode in clear text, with the function already selected highlighted in white: In Preselection mode, you can program the storage urn for:

- Empty - Half full - Full (economy) - Full (power)

Use the arrow keys to move to page 2 (Full). Touch the setting you want to select.

Page 71: Training Manual CombiNationF

125

This setting then appears as a symbol in the display:

empty

half full

full Eco

full Press the OK soft key each time to confirm your choice. A programmed switching time can be cleared again by pressing the C soft key (deletion visible in the indicator --‘--). If you use the Plus (up arrow) and Minus (down arrow) keys in the “Action” column, after scrolling through the setting options in Preselection mode, you will automatically move on to the setting options in other modes, such as Cleaning mode (see chapter 10.1.3 on page 126), Operating time (see chapter 10.1.1 on page 121) or Self-service mode (see chapter 10.1.4 on page 127). The column heading “Prg” denotes the 16 switching times that can be set for each day. Once you have pressed the OK soft key to confirm the desired action, all the programmed switching times will automatically be arranged in chronological order. By pressing the soft key in the display as a check, you can access the Timer Check directly (see chapter 10.2 Timer check on page 129).

Page 72: Training Manual CombiNationF

126

10.1.3 Setting the machine cleaning times To set the timer on your coffee machine, press the soft key in the selection menu.

The following display appears: Then press the Timeradjustment soft key.

The following symbol appears in the display: Press the cleaning soft key to program automatic cleaning of your coffee machine.

In the following menu you can set the day, time (for an example, see chapter 10.1.1 Setting the operating times on page 121) and the desired action your coffee machine is to perform. Under the column heading “Action” you can select the various possible settings for your coffee machine.

Touch the centre of the symbol panel to see all the options that can be set in Cleaning mode in clear text, with the function already selected highlighted in white:

Cleaning mode, you can only program:

- Clean machine without switching off. To do this, touch the w /o Switching off soft key. If you want to switch off the machine automatically after cleaning, you can program this in Operating Time mode. In that mode, there is a cleaning + off soft key (see chapter 10.1.1 Setting the operating times on page 121). Always ensure that the front panel pushed downwards to clean the machine otherwise the cleaning process will not start automatically. Always place the protective panel provided (cleaning adapter) in front of the spouts before starting cleaning.

Page 73: Training Manual CombiNationF

127

Your chosen setting then appears as a symbol in the display:

W / o Switching off Press the OK soft key to confirm your choice. A programmed switching time can be cleared again by pressing the C soft key. (deletion visible in the indicator --‘--).

If you use the Plus (up arrow) and Minus (down arrow) keys in the “Action” column, after scrolling through the setting options in Cleaning mode, you will automatically move on to the setting options in other modes, such as Preselection mode (see chapter 10.1.2 on page 124), Operating Time mode (see chapter 10.1.1 on page 121) or Self-service mode (see chapter 10.1.4 on page 127). The column heading “Prg” denotes the 16 switching times that can be set for each day. Once you have pressed the OK soft key to confirm the desired action, all the programmed switching times will automatically be arranged in chronological order. By pressing the soft key in the display as a check, you can access the Timer Check directly (see chapter 10.2 Timer check on page 129).

10.1.4 Setting switch-over to self-service mode To set the timer on your coffee machine, press the soft key in the selection menu.

The following display appears: Then press the Timeradjustment soft key.

Page 74: Training Manual CombiNationF

128

The following symbol appears in the display: Use the arrow keys to move on to the second page at this level. Press the SelfService Mod soft key to program automatic switching on and switching off of your coffee machine in self-service mode.

In the following menu you can set the day, time (for an example, see chapter 10.1.1 Setting the operating times on page 121) and the desired action your coffee machine is to perform. Under the column heading “Action” you can select the various possible settings.

Touch the centre of the symbol panel to see all the options that can be set in Self-service mode in clear text,

with the function already selected highlighted in white: In Self-service mode, you can program the self-service options:

- Switch on or - Switch off.

To do this, touch the setting you want.

That setting then appears as a symbol in the display:

SelfServ.Mode off

SelfServ.Mode on Press the OK soft key to confirm your choice. A programmed switching time can be cleared again by pressing the C soft key (deletion visible in the indicator --‘--).

Page 75: Training Manual CombiNationF

129

If you use the Plus (up arrow) and Minus (down arrow) keys in the “Action” column, after scrolling through the setting options in Self-service mode, you will automatically move on to the setting options in other modes, such as Preselection mode (see chapter 10.1.2 on page 124), Operating Time (see chapter 10.1.1 on page 121) or Cleaning mode (see chapter 10.1.3 on page 126). The column heading “Prg” denotes the 16 switching times that can be set for each day. Once you have pressed the OK soft key to confirm the desired action, all the programmed switching times will automatically be sorted in chronological order. By pressing the soft key in the display as a check, you can access the Timer Check directly (see chapter 10.2 Timer check on page 129).

10.2 Timer check To check your programmed switching times in the Timer Check, press the soft key in the selection menu.

The following display appears: Then press the TimerTable soft key.

You can now display the preset operating times or your programmed preselection settings in the timer check.

Page 76: Training Manual CombiNationF

130

On pressing the Running time soft key, the following display appears: You can now select for example, from Mondays to Fridays (1-5) the machine switches on automatically at 07:00 and switches off again automatically at 20:00, after carrying out cleaning. On Saturdays, the machine is operational from 08:00 to 16:00 and on Sundays, from 09:00 to 18:00. Cleaning is carried out at the end of each day.

On pressing the Preselection soft key, the following display appears: You can now select for example, different quantity preselections programmed for Monday to Friday (days 1-5). The thickness of the white bar indicates the level in the storage urn, according to the preselection chosen. For example, you can select the preselection for a higher setting between 14:00 and 16:00 each day.

Page 77: Training Manual CombiNationF

131

10.3 Making changes to the timer 10.3.1 Copying the timer Once a full day’s sequence has been set up, it can easily be copied to other days. Start from the timer setting mode.

Note: The Copy function can be accessed from any setting mode (Operating Time, Preselection, Cleaning or Self-service mode). In each case, the complete day is copied, with all the actions set, etc.

Under the column heading “Day”, press the

symbol panel (in this case 1 for example) to access day of the week selection. Then use the arrow keys to scroll to page four, and touch the Copy Day soft key.

Now select the day you would like to copy to other days. For instance, you have already programmed Monday and now want to transfer your settings to Thursday. Start by pressing the Monday soft key.

The day to be copied will now be stored while you carry out copying. This is shown in the display as follows:

Page 78: Training Manual CombiNationF

132

Next, select the Insert Day option and select the day to which you want to copy your Monday settings.

In our example, that day is Tuesday. Touch the Tuesday soft key in the display.

The day you have copied will now be pasted. All the switching times programmed for Monday have now been copied to Tuesday, and will immediately apply to Tuesdays as well. You can also store other days at the same time. Simply press on the soft key “Add day” and select further weekdays; the reference day copied over at the beginning remains in the memory.

10.3.2 Clearing the timer To clear the switching times for individual days or to clear the whole timer, in Timer mode use the arrow keys to scroll to the second page and press the Delete Timer soft key on that page.

Now select the day to be cleared and touch the appropriate day of the week in the display:

As a safeguard, you are asked to confirm that you really want to clear the day selected. If so, press OK to confirm. Once cleared, the settings can no longer be recovered.

Page 79: Training Manual CombiNationF

133

10.4 Timer information The Timer Information function provides information about the next timer action which is due to be carried out.

In Timer mode, scroll to page two and press the Timer info soft key.

The machine timer is switched on. The next action that the timer is due to carry out is to set the preselection to half full at 16:00.

Page 80: Training Manual CombiNationF

134

11 Care of the machine Daily cleaning of the coffee machine is very important in order to ensure correct operation of the machine and optimum coffee quality. Accordingly, 26 hours after switching on the machine, a message will appear in the display 4 reminding you to carry out daily cleaning. To ensure the cleaning program is carried out, after a further 24 hours the machine will automatically halt beverage dispensing if the cleaning program has not yet been run. In this case, the cleaning program must be run in order to operate the machine again. If the machine is switched off without cleaning after brewing and if more than 26 hours have elapsed since it was last cleaned when it is switched on again, then the machine will remain blocked after warming up. The cleaning program must be run before the machine can be operated again.

Caution! There is a danger of scalding and burning in the area of the coffee spout 6 and the hot water spout 11, in particular when the front panel is in the raised position and when the coffee spout 6 has been removed.

Caution! Health hazard! Follow the precautions on the pack when using the cleaning beverage. The cleaner is corrosive. Cleaning fluid flows out of the coffee spout 6 while cleaning is taking place. The cleaning adapters must be fitted. Take care not to leave jugs or cups underneath the coffee spout while cleaning is in progress. Wait until prompted by the display before placing cleaner granulate in the manual input.

Page 81: Training Manual CombiNationF

135

11.1 Cleaning the machine To clean the machine, start by sliding the front panel 12 down. Always make sure the front panel is in the lowered position when cleaning the machine, as otherwise the cleaning process will not start.

Important! Always fit the housings provided (cleaning

adapters) over the spouts before starting cleaning. Never reach under the spouts while cleaning is in progress. There is a danger of burning and scalding.

11.1.1 Fully automatic cleaning

(using automatic granulate cleaning) To fill the granulate cleaning reservoir 3 remove the lid and fill the reservoir with cleaning granulate (order no. 33.2118.6000). Then replace the lid to close the granulate reservoir.

The machine is ready for operation and the following display is shown, or the display for the storage setting selected: Press the soft key to enter a second level, where a selection menu allows you to run the cleaning program.

12

3

Page 82: Training Manual CombiNationF

136

If you have allocated access authorisations (PIN numbers) (see chapter 8.4 on page 103), on pressing the soft key you will be asked for your PIN number. Key in your PIN number. When the correct PIN number is entered, the selection menu is displayed. If you wish to run the machine cleaning program, press the

soft key in the selection menu.

The following display appears: Select the Machine soft key in order to clean the machine.

Note: Always ensure the granulate cleaning reservoir 3 is

full. Only WMF special cleaning granulate should be used (order no. 33.2118.6000). Take care not to overfill the reservoir 3, however, as this can block the granulate meter.

Press the SwitchingOff soft key or the no SwitchingOff soft key to choose whether the machine is to return to “ready” mode after cleaning, or to be switched off automatically after cleaning – in this case, press SwitchingOff.

After selecting the cleaning mode, you will be asked again to confirm that you wish to clean the machine. Press the

soft key to confirm your choice, or press to quit the selection without carrying out cleaning. Any remaining coffee will then be drained from the storage urn automatically during cleaning. The following display will appear:

If your coffee machine is connected to the grouts separator model 9011, you will now be asked to remove the grounds catcher from the grouts separator...

Page 83: Training Manual CombiNationF

137

...empty it...

...clean it...

...and replace it in position.

Before cleaning starts, you will now be asked to fit the cleaning adapters underneath the spouts.

Important! Always fit the housings provided (cleaning

adapters) over the spouts before starting cleaning. Never reach underneath the spouts while cleaning is in progress. There is a danger of burning and scalding.

Press to confirm that you have fitted the housing in place. The following display appears:

The duration of the cleaning program is approximately 25 minutes. While the cleaning program is running, the display shows the remaining cleaning time.

Page 84: Training Manual CombiNationF

138

11.1.2 Semi-automatic cleaning

(via the manual input) The machine is ready for operation and the following display is shown, or the display for the storage setting selected: Press the soft key to enter a second level, where a selection menu allows you to run the cleaning program.

If you have allocated access authorisations (PIN numbers) (see chapter 8.4 on page 103), on pressing the soft key you will be asked for your PIN number. Key in your PIN number. When the correct PIN number is input, the selection menu is displayed

If you wish to run the machine cleaning program, press the

soft key in the selection menu.

The following display appears: Select the Machine soft key in order to clean the machine.

Press the SwitchingOff soft key or the no SwitchingOff soft key to choose whether the machine is to return to “ready” mode after cleaning, or to be switched off automatically after cleaning – in this case, press SwitchingOff.

After selecting the cleaning mode, you will be asked again to confirm that you wish to clean the machine. Press the

soft key to confirm your choice, or press to quit the selection without carrying out cleaning.

Any remaining coffee will then be drained from the storage urn automatically during cleaning. Before cleaning starts, you will now be asked to fit the cleaning adapters underneath the spouts.

Page 85: Training Manual CombiNationF

139

Important! Always fit the housings provided (cleaning

adapters) over the spouts before starting cleaning. Never reach underneath the spouts while cleaning is in progress! There is a danger of burning and scalding.

After selecting the cleaning mode and confirming that you wish to clean the machine, you will be asked to place cleaning granulate in the manual input.

Open the input cover 8, and for a single-beverage machine pour in one level coffee spoon (order no. 33 0742 3000), or for a two-beverage machine two coffee spoons of WMF special cleaning granulate and close the input cover again.

Note: Only WMF special cleaning granulate should be

used to clean the machine. Order no. 33 2118 6000. It is important to follow the directions on the

cleaning granulate pack.

The duration of the cleaning program is approximately 25 minutes. While the cleaning program is running, the display shows the remaining cleaning time.

11.2 Cleaning using the timer The cleaning times can be programmed and automatically switched on by using the “Timer” function in the machine selection menu. Times are assigned to the day of the week and are not controlled by the date. For the settings, see chapter 10 Timer functions on page 120.

Page 86: Training Manual CombiNationF

140

12 Error messages / remedial action Your WMF combiNation F has a built-in diagnostic program. Any errors occurring will appear in the display 4.

The symbol indicates that an error has occurred or that the operator’s attention is required. The following error messages are currently implemented:

The ground coffee hopper 1 is empty.

Refill with ground coffee (see chapter 7.2 on page 86) and press the soft key Refill coffee GC Hopper one and confirm.

The following display then appears: Press once more to confirm.

The grouts collector in the grouts separator is full. Remove the grouts collector, empty it and replace it in position (see chapter 11 on page 134). Press the soft key Emptied grounds contain and confirm. If the message is not confirmed after twenty seconds by pressing the soft key then one can assume that the grouts collector was not emptied. The grout contents counter will not be deleted. The following indicator appears in the display after successful confirmation. Confirm by touching on the appropriate soft key to see whether the container was really emptied or not.

The granulate cleaning reservoir 3 is empty.

Fill up with cleaning granulate (see chapter 11.1.1 on page 135) and press the Clean.urn empty please refill soft key to confirm.

The following display then appears: Press once more to confirm.

Page 87: Training Manual CombiNationF

141

No water pressure. Open the shutoff valve in the water inlet. No confirmation will be requested in the display. The message disappears automatically if there is water pressure present for at least 10 seconds.

Service date exceeded.

Call your WMF customer service. No confirmation will be requested in the display.

The message will be removed until the machine is switched on again after confirmation by touching the

soft key.

Moving the panel upwards/downwards

Move the front panel upwards/downwards (a message appears after pressing a beverage key which requires a particular position of the front panel: e.g. front panel lowered - beverage key “Mug” - Message “Move panel upwards” The message disappears automatically after seven seconds.

No release of accounting

The message appears after the customer has pressed a beverage key which is not released for use by the accounting system. The message disappears automatically after seven seconds.

Not enough in storage urn The message appears if the remaining amount in the storage urn cannot be dispensed completely. Please note: there must be a residual amount of at least 300 ml. in the storage urn to obtain good mixing with the next storage urn brew. The message disappears automatically after seven seconds.

Page 88: Training Manual CombiNationF

142

13 WMF customer service WMF’s comprehensive service network allows every area to be reached in a short period of time. Our personnel are experienced experts and carry special tools and the original spare parts required at all times, so that malfunctions can be ascertained on the spot.

Note: Please bear in mind that this is a professional coffee machine, designed for commercial use. Such a machine requires regular maintenance by WMF customer service. Maintenance intervals depend on how heavily the machine is used, but maintenance should be carried out at least once a year as a minimum. In order to ensure regular inspection of your machine, we recommend that a regular machine maintenance schedule be arranged with your local WMF service engineer.

14 Liability WMF shall be liable for legitimate defects as to quality as follows:

Any beverages delivered or any services rendered showing a defect as to quality within the period of limitation shall be, at WMF’s reasonable discretion, repaired or rendered again, if the cause of the defect as to quality had already been present when the risk was passed.

Claims for defects as to quality are subject to a limitation period of 12 months. This period shall

start with the day when the risk is passed. The above period shall not apply in case there are longer periods required by the German Civil Code (BGB), e.g. pursuant to § 479 Sec. 1 BGB (right of recourse of the contractor), 438 Sec. 1 No. 2 BGB (buildings and things for buildings) and § 634a BGB (defects of construction). If putting the machine into operation is delayed for longer than four weeks due to reasons that are beyond the control of WMF, the warranty period shall begin four weeks after the machine being delivered to the customer.

The buyer shall immediately give written notice of defects as to quality to WMF. Replaced parts shall pass into the ownership of WMF. At first WMF shall always be given the opportunity for a subsequent performance within a reasonable period. The buyer shall make available the rejected object to WMF.

Page 89: Training Manual CombiNationF

143

We are not liable: - for any components that are subject to a normal wear and tear. This includes but is not

limited to gaskets and washers, ribbons, and proportioning devices; - for defects caused by atmospheric influences, deposit of boiler scale, chemical, physical,

electro-chemical or electrical influences, unless these defects are attributed to a fault of WMF; - if a water filter is dispensed with, although the on-site water regime requires the use of a

water filter, and this results in defects. It is pointed out to the customer in the respective acknowledgement of order, whether the use of a water filter is required;

- for defects resulting from the failure to comply with the instructions relating to the handling, maintenance and attendance of the device (e.g. operating and maintenance instructions of WMF laid down in the operating manual of the respective percolator type);

- for defects resulting from the inappropriate or improper use, from the failure to use WMF genuine spare parts or from the faulty installation by the buyer or a third party, or from a faulty or negligent handling; and for consequences from modifications or repair works that were made improperly and without our consent by the buyer or a third party.

Claims for damages by the buyer, irrespective of their legal grounds, particularly on account of violations of the contractual obligation and on account of tortious acts, shall be excluded. The above exclusion shall not apply in so far as there is a mandatory liability, e.g. in case of giving warranties as to quality or durability, pursuant to the German Beverage Liability Act, in cases of wilful acts, of gross negligence, of fatal injuries, of bodily injuries or injuries to health, or in case of any violation of substantive obligations from this contract. A reversal of the burden of proof to the disadvantage of the buyer is not implied by the above regulations.

Page 90: Training Manual CombiNationF

144

Page 91: Training Manual CombiNationF

7/0 Spare parts list

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS 7/0-1

Part 7 - Spare parts list Spare parts list for combiNation F

7

Page 92: Training Manual CombiNationF

Appendix

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

7/0-2

Page 93: Training Manual CombiNationF

6/0 Drawings

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

6/0-1

Part 6 - Drawings

6.1 Drawings combiNation F

03 8700 0000 Sheet 110 Main dimension drawing, single coffee 03 8700 0000 Sheet 111 Main dimension drawing, double coffee

03 8700 0000 Sheet 112 Main dimension drawing, single coffee, ship version

03 8700 0000 Sheet 113 Main dimension drawing, double coffee, ship version

03 8700 0000 Sheet 114 Main dimension drawing, single coffee, with rear tap

03 8700 0000 Sheet 120 Piping diagram, single coffee 03 8700 0000 Sheet 121 Piping diagram, double coffee 03 8700 0000 Sheet 122 Piping diagram, single coffee, ship version 03 8700 0000 Sheet 123 Piping diagram, double -coffee, ship version 03 8700 0000 Sheet 130 VP Front door 03 8700 0000 Sheet 131 VP Power stage 03 8700 0000 Sheet 132 VP basic unit, single coffee 03 8700 0000 Sheet 133 VP basic unit, double coffee 03 8700 0000 Sheet 134 VP power supply 13,5 kW 03 8700 0000 Sheet 135 VP power supply 200V 03 8700 0000 Sheet 136 VP power supply 440V 03 8700 0000 Sheet 137 VP power supply 440V, ship version 03 8700 0000 Sheet 138 VP dispensing on backside 03 8700 0000 Sheet 140 Circuit diagram 03 8700 0000 Sheet 141 Circuit diagram, table 03 8700 0000 Sheet 150 VP serial interface 03 8700 0000 Sheet 151 VP parallel interface 03 8700 0000 Sheet 152 VP multicounter 03 8700 0000 Sheet 161 VP power supply 230V 03 8700 0000 Sheet 162 2 x power supply; ship version 400V 03 8700 0000 Sheet 163 Power optimization connection cNF 03 8500 0000 Sheet 164 WMF-Combination-S-VP-LST-230V-4-8kW03 8700 0000 Sheet 165 WMF_Combination_F_2_mal_Netz_Schiff_440V03 8700 0000 Sheet 166 WMF_Combination_F_2_mal_Netz_Schiff_400V

6

Page 94: Training Manual CombiNationF

Drawings

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

6/0-2

03 8700 0000 Sheet 167 WMF-Combination-F-VP-Heizung-Granulatfrei

03 8700 0000 Sheet 168 WMF-Combination-F-VP-LST-13-8KW-SCHIFF-440V

03 8700 0000 Sheet 169 WMF-CNF-VP-Potentialfreier-Kontakt

6.2 Drawings Chocolate dispenser

33 2762 1000 Sheet 110 Machine drawing chocolate dispenser

33 2762 1000 Sheet 112 Machine drawing chocolate dispenser ship version

33 2762 1000 Sheet 120 Piping diagram, chocolate dispenser

33 2762 1000 Sheet 130 Wiring diagram chocolate dispenser

6.3 Drawing Accounting 33 2781 4000 Sheet 130 cN wiring diagram, coin checker

33 2781 4000 Sheet 131 cN wiring diagram, coin changer with enabling contact

33 2781 6000 Sheet 130 cN wiring diagram, coin changer MDB

33 2781 7000 Sheet 130 cN wiring diagram, card reader 8-Preis

33 2781 7100 Sheet 130 Kartenleser-4-Preis-Combination-VP

33 2781 8000 Sheet 130 cN wiring diagram, card reader MDB

Page 95: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/0 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/0-1

Part 5 - Service

5/1 Starting up

5/2 Setting ranges for Product data

5/3 Setting ranges for machine data

5/4 Component test

5/5 Service routines

5/6 Service Information

5/7 Mechanical adjustments

5/8 Maintenance

5/9 Installing retrofit modules

5/10 Important infos

5

Page 96: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/0-2

Page 97: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/1 Starting up

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/1-1

5/1 Starting up

5/1.1 Settings checklist for starting up 5/1.1.1 Settings checklist with a laptop Starting up and setting with the aid of a laptop and the Configuration Tool softwareAfter the machine has been connected to the water supply and the mains voltage and the tap has been opened, wait at least 5 minutes to ensure that the heaters are immersed in the water.

First of all:Machine should be warmed up, filled with coffee and ready for operation.

Setting location Setting

Machine configuration 1 Bottom status line This shows whether later software than the version on the

machine is available. 2 Software If later software is available on the laptop, transfer it via

the power stage or front panel. 3 Machine equipment Check whether the setting in the software corresponds to

the actual machine equipment. Test environment 4 Commissioning

routine Proceed in accordance with the instructions in the programme.

CAUTION!!! Step 4 is not yet implemented. Instead, carry out the following actions at this point: Open a hot-water valve until no further air escapes. Execute the urn calibration in the service routines and save the new values. Then always execute a first startup.

Product configuration 5 Set the brewing batches and the brewing quantities

(adjusting the mixing valve). 6 Set the coffee quality of the individual batches in

accordance with the customer's wishes: (brewing can be initiated only from the display)

7 Set all buttons in accordance with the customer's wishes and test their operation (quantity, portioning variant).

8 Save the new settings in the Service memory. Backup with machine configuration 9 Once everything is set, start the machine configuration

again and choose “Save” to save all the settings on your laptop.

On completion of commissioning, please write on the installation invoice “Water and power supply to machine must be turned off at close of business”. The customer must sign to indicate that he/she has duly noted this information.

See“Problems with the taste of the coffee“ 5/6.6

Page 98: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/1-2

5/1.1.2 Settings checklist without a laptop If a laptop with the Configuration Tool software is not available, all the settings can be set up via the touch display.

After the machine has been connected to the water supply and the mains voltage and the tap has been opened, wait at least 5 minutes to ensure that the heaters are immersed in the water.

Prerequisite:Machine is warmed up, is filled with ground coffee and is ready for use.

Step What is adjusted Setting

Machine data 1 All steps except

"Standards"Check and set all machine-data settings to match the machine configuration.

Component test 2 Hot water valve Open a hot water valve until no further air

escapes from the boiler. Service routines 3 Urn calibration Execute urn calibration for all storage urns and

save the new values. 4 First run up Always execute this step after calibration of the

urn.Product data 5 Set the brewing batches and the brewing

quantities (adjusting the mixing valve). 6 Set the coffee quality of the individual batches

in accordance with the customer's wishes. 7 Set all buttons in accordance with the

customer's wishes and test their operation (quantity, portioning variant).

Machine data 8 Standards Save the new settings in the service memory

(customer service).

On completion of commissioning, please write on the installation invoice “Water and power supply to machine must be turned off at close of business”. The customer must sign to indicate that he/she has duly noted this information.

See“Problems with the taste of the coffee“ 5/7.6

Page 99: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/1 Starting up

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/1-3

5/1.2 Default values 5/1.2.1 Factory settings for machine data

Main menu

Setting Range Default value RemarksCounters See software

description.All set to 0

Cleaning See sub-menu 26/50 hours Error list Display the Error

listNo errors Individual errors

can be marked and deleted or the entire list can be deleted.

Service dates See sub-menu Filter replace See sub-menu Grounds catcher See sub-menu Storage urn See sub-menu Boiler See sub-menu Accounting See sub-menu Double click See sub-menu Standards See sub-menu

Sub-menus

SubmenuCleaning Cleaning, actual Number of cleaning

operations executed0

Cleaning, planned Or must

Number of operating days

0

Cleaning mode Cleaning warning and interlock can be set

26/50

Forced cleaning Yes/No Yes Compulsory cleaning Yes/No Yes If granulate

portioner fitted Number of granule pills

0-255 100 If automatic cleaning is active

Neutralisation Yes/No No

See chapter „Machine datas” Part 4 - Software

Page 100: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/1-4

Submenu Service dates Last Service visit Displays the date of the last visit New entry for today? Enters today's date Next Service visit Can be set Submenu Maintenance Flow since maintenance

The flow is displayed in litres 10 000 bis 50 000

Flow until maintenance The flow is displayed in litres 100 bis 50 000

Submenu Filter change Filter available Yes/No Flow since filter exchange

The flow is displayed in litres

0 Can be reset after clicking on it

Flow until filter exchange

100 bis 50 000 2500

Submenu Grounds catcher Grounds catcher operating mode

None/withsensor/withoutsensor

None

Volume 500-5000 g of ground coffee

2500 g of ground coffee

If with or without sensor is active

Counter filling 0 If with or without sensor is active

Flushing time 1-30 sec 8 sec Only if with sensor is active

Maximum brewing cycles

1-100 cycles 5 Only if with sensor is active

Grounds catcher information

Displays the operating status of the grounds catcher

Can be cleared

Submenu Storage urn Storage time 0-90 min. 0 Automatic emptying Yes/No No Only if storage

time is set High-speed brewing Yes/No No Submenu Boiler Desired temperature 80-97°C 96°C Heater power 6/9/13.5 kW 9 kW Submenu Accessory Unit Chocolate dispenser Yes/No No Rear tap Yes/No No

Page 101: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/1 Starting up

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/1-5

Submenu Accounting Accounting None/MC/SE/1

MP/2MPNone SE is detected

automatically after reset

Submenu Double click Double click Yes/No Yes Delay 0-2000 msec 600 msec. Only if double

click is active Submenu Standards Service customer Customer Service Factory Service/customer

5/1.2.2 Factory settings for Product data

The specified quantities are maximum quantities. If the desired brewing quantity is not achieved, adjust the amount of mixing water by changing the time for the jet valve.

Please note that the default values are in all cases less than or equal to the values for a 1 litre or 1 litre batch.

5/1.2.2.1 Portioning Product Portioning

variantPortioning amount

Door position

Cup of coffee Portioned 130 ml down Pot of coffee Portioned 250 ml down Pot of coffee Free-flow 1000 ml up Cup of coffee, urn2 Portioned 130 ml down Pot of coffee, urn2 Portioned 250 ml down Pot of coffee, urn2 Free-flow 1000 ml up Mug of coffee Portioned 180 ml down Mug of coffee, urn2 Disabled

Portioned 180 ml down

HW small, down Portioned 130 ml down HW large, down Portioned 250 ml down HW small, up Free-flow 500 ml up HW large, up Free-flow 1000 ml up

See chapter „Product datas” Part 4 Software

Page 102: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/1-6

5/1.2.2.2 Brewing cycles

Recipe Portioner1

Portioner2

Groundcoffee

Water Mixingtime

1l urn1 cycle GCH1 GCH1 60 g 520 ml 13 sec 2l eco urn1 cycle GCH1 GCH1 100 g 1020 ml 27 sec 2l urn1 cycle GCH1 GCH1 115 g 700 ml 36 sec 1l urn2 cycle GCH2 GCH2 60 g 520 ml 13 sec 2l eco urn2 cycle GCH2 GCH2 100 g 1020 ml 27 sec 2l urn2 cycle GCH2 GCH2 115 g 700 ml 36 sec

5/1.2.3 Default button assignments

Main buttonpad: On double coffee machines, buttonpad for urn2:

Pot of coffee Mug of coffee

Mug of coffee Small pot of coffee Small pot of coffee Cup of coffee

Cup of coffee

5/1.2.4 Default values; chocolate dispenser start keys

Dispensing Qty. of powder for product

Hot water setting

Product qty. dispensed Cycle time *

1 cup approx. 25 g 145 120 cc 13 sec 2 mug approx. 38 g 216 180 cc 20 sec 3 pot approx. 50 g 290 240 cc 26 sec

* Cycle times depend on the specific weight of the chocolate powder. The heavier the product, the shorter the cycle time.

See chapter „Product datas” Part 4 - Software

See chapter 2/4 Controls „Front door” Part 2 - Engineering

Page 103: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/2 Product datas

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

5/2-1

5/2 Product data

5/2.1 Service - Product data

The Product data, such as portioning quantities and the amount of ground coffee for brewing, can be set easily in customer mode. Service mode permits further settings.

For the portioning: Portioning variants For the brewings: General, brewing, jet water

5/2.1.1 Entry to setting portioning and brewing

Starting from the menu: press Product data

Setting portioning Setting brewing Press the dispensing button. The selected product can be set.

Press “Select Prod.”

The following can be selected under “General”:

RecipePortioning quantity Portioning option

Door mode* Product text

* see “Door switch” Controls in Part 2, Engineering

Select the desired brewing cycle:

The “large” hot water portioning options can only be accessed via the “Select Prod.” function.

Example: 1 Ltr Brew Urn selected

See“Settingproduct data“ Operating instructions - Part 8

Page 104: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/2-2

Setting portioning – general

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Product data Portioning

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Recipe Door mode* 2 Portioning quantity Product text 3 Portioning option

The individual brewing settings can be selected only via the function "Select product".

Different entry to portioning and brewing See 4/12.2.1.1 “Entry to setting portioning and brewing”

Setting brewing - general

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Product data Brewing

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 1. Portioner 2 2. Portioner 3

Setting brewing - brewing

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Product data Brewing

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Qty. Ground Coffee 2 Qty. Water 3

Seedoor mode ”controls” Part 2 – Engineering

Page 105: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/2 Product datas

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

5/2-3

Setting brewing - jet water

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Product data Jet

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Mixing Time 2 3

5/2.3 Setting ranges for Product data

5/2.3.1 General

GeneralObject Lower value Upper value Step Unit Remarks

Recipe See table of defaults for products

See table of defaults for products

Can be set only if portioning is active

Portioning amount

0 4000 5 ml Can be set only if portioning is active

Portioning variant

Portioned,start/stop,free-flow,free-flowportioned

Portioned,start/stop,free-flow,free-flowportioned

Can be set only if portioning is active

Coffee-type text

See table of setting ranges

See table of setting ranges

Can be set only if portioning is active

Portioner 1 GCH1 GCH2 For urn brewing only

Portioner 2 GCH1 GCH2 For urn brewing only

Coin checker None, MP1, MP2 Keiner, MP1, MP2 Only if coin checker fitted and portioning active

Coffee-type text

11 characters, freely selectable

Can be set only if portioning is active

See"Product data" 4/12 Software - Part 4

See"Portioning variants" Hot water output 2/5Engineering – Part 2

Page 106: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/2-4

5/2.3.2 Brewing

BrewingGround coffee 0 255 1 mg For urn brewing only

Water 0 2400 5 ml For urn brewing only

5/2.3.3 Adding water

Adding water Mixing valve open

0 100 1 sec For urn brewing only

See"Brewing cycles" 4/13 Software - Part 4

Page 107: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/3 Machine data

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/3-1

5/3 Machine data

5/3.1 Overview software “Machine data” The main menu "Machine data" is opened from the Service main menu

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Line Select function page 1 Select function page 2 Select function page 3 1 Product data Service routines 2 Machine data Service info 3 Components Accounting

5/3.1.1 Main menu “Machine data”

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 Counter Service Date Grounds Catcher 2 Cleaning Maintenance counter Storage Urn 3 Error List Filter replace Boiler

Line Main menu page 4 Main menu page 5 Main menu page 6 1 Accessory Unit Double Click 2 Accounting Standards 3 Self-service mode

Page 108: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/3-2

5/3.1.2 Submenus “Machine data”

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Counters

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Total Brewing Hotwater 2L Eco brewing 2 Total Dosing Chocolate 2L brewing 3 Coffee 1 litre brewing Operating Time

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Cleaning

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Cleanings Actual Compulsory Cleaning Neutralization 2 Cleanings Must Automatic Cleaning 3 Cleaning Mode Granulate

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Error List

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Error text 1 2 Error text 2 3 etc.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Service Date

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Last Service Date 2 Next Service Date 3

Page 109: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/3 Machine data

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/3-3

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Maintenan. Counter

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Flow since maintenance 2 Flow until maintenance 3

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Filter Replacement

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Filter available 2 Flow since filter exchange 3 Flow until filter exchange

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Grounds catcher

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Oper. At Mode, Gr.Cat. Flushing Time Grounds Catcher Info. 2 Content to Info Maximum brewings 3 Level Indicator Display Time

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Accounting

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 None MC/SE 2 Coin checker 3 2nd coin checker

Page 110: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/3-4

Auswahlmenü: Main menu: Submenu: SERVICE

Maschinendaten Self-Service Mode

Zeile Submenu screen 1 Submenu screen 2 Submenu screen 3 1 Error information 2 Confirmation 3

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Double click

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Double click 2 Deceleration 3

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Standards

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Service Customer

2 Customer Service

3 Factory Service / Customer

Page 111: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/4 Component test

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/4-1

5/4 Component test

5/4.1 Overview software “Component test” The main menu "Component Test" is opened from the Service main menu

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Line Select function page 1 Select function page 2 Select function page 3 1 Product data Service routines 2 Machine data Service info 3 Components Accounting

5/4.1.1 Main menu “Component test”

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Component test

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 Brewer motor Flush in Valve Brewing Valve Hot water 2 Portioner Flush out Valve Hotwater Valve 3 Storage urn Cleaning Motor Boiler Heating

Line Main menu page 4 Main menu page 5 Main menu page 6 1 Spout Heating Fan Switch-on Relay 2 Door Switch Controls Backup Battery 3 Manual Input Key switch Display Illumin

Line Main menu page 7 Main menu page 8 Main menu page 9 1 Cleaning 2 Grounds Catcher 3 Chocolate Dispenser

Page 112: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/4-2

5/4.1.2 Submenus “Component Test”

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Component test Portioner

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Portioner 1 2 Portioner 2* 3

*Only on a F2 Machine

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Component test Storage urn

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Rinsing valve Drain valve 2 Coffee output valve Inlet valve 3 Jet valve Level controller pobe

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Component test Controls

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Product LEDs 2 Product Buttons 3 Touch Test

Selected function Main menu Sub menu SERVICE

Component test Cleaning

Line Sub menu page 1 1 Granulate hopper motor 2 Light barrier 3

Page 113: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/4 Component test

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/4-3

Selected function Main menu Sub menu SERVICE

Component test Cleaning

Line Sub menu page 1 1 Granulate hopper motor 2 Light barrier 3

Page 114: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/4-4

Page 115: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/5 Service routines

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

5/5-1

5/5 Service routines

5/5.1 Overview software “Service Routines” The main menu "Service Routines" is opened from the Service main menu

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Line Select function page 1 Select function page 2 Select function page 3 1 Product data Service routines 2 Machine data Service info 3 Components Accounting

5/5.1.1 Main menu “Service Routines”

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Service routines

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 First Run Up Chocolate adjustment 2 Urn 1 leveling Descaling programme 3 Brewer rinsing

Page 116: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/5-2

Seedescaling programme in chapter 5/8.5 “Maintenance”

5/5.2 Tips and Hints “Service Routines”

5/5.2.1 Urn calibration The probe must be cleaned before calibration. Switch off the boiler heater and drain the storage urn. Drain the hot water from the boiler via the jet and rinsing valves, the storage urn and the drain and coffee output valves (this takes about 130 seconds). Record the probe value in the empty state. In the idle position of the brewer, the outlet rinsing valve fills the brewing chamber. The piston then moves to the brewing position and the brewing valve opens and the drain and coffee-output valves remain open together for about 30 seconds. The digital values are then recorded sequentially up to the 4.0 litre mark. After this, the actual level in the storage urn can be measured. If the newly recorded calibration curve is strictly monotonous, it can be accepted. If you do not want to accept the new curve, the default values can be used.

Error handling The signal from the controller is monitored for plausibility (lower value 37 digits, upper value 235 digits). Any errors are shown on the display. The number of detected errors is stored in the error memory.

5/5.2.2 First run up The internal flags in the machine are reset. The first startup is treated like switching the power off and on again. A "Reset" event is always recorded in the laptop error memory.

5/5.2.3 Descaling programme

See descalingprogramme in chapter 5/8.5 Maintenance.

Page 117: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/6 Service information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/6-1

5/6 Service info

5/6.1 Overview software “Service Info” The main menu "Service Info" is opened from the Service main menu

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Line Select function page 1 Select function page 2 Select function page 3 1 Product data Service routines 2 Machine data Service info 3 Components Accounting

5/6.2 Main menu “Service Info”

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Service-Info

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 Software version Last Service visit 2 Front door Error list 3 Power stage

Page 118: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/6-2

Page 119: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/7 Mechanical adjustments

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/7-1

5/7 Mechanical adjustments

5/7.1 Ground-coffee portioner (GCH), setting the nozzles

Adjust the nozzles on the GCH openings so that the ground coffee falls through the middle of the hole in the brewer funnel, directly into the brewer.

Factory settings: Version GCH left Version GCH right

1. Set nozzle to vertical position. 2. Turn 7 teeth in direction of arrow.

1. Set nozzle to vertical position. 2. Turn 13 teeth in direction of arrow.

Caution! Danger of PINCHING or CUTTING! Do not reach into the GCH or the GCH outlet when the machine is switched on.

Page 120: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/7-2

5/7.2 Front door, alignment and ease of movement The front door is tilted at an angle of 5° and moves parallel to the machine and about 1 mm away from it. The front door is carried on two parallel guides to permit it to be raised and lowered. These guides are 397 mm apart (set in the factory). Any subsequent adjustment of the guide spacing must always be carried out on the machine side. For this purpose, there are two movable sheet-metal pieces, secured with M3 screws, at the top and bottom of the guide. For adjustment, remove the machine cover and take out the grounds catcher and then slightly loosen the M3 screws. Then move the front door up and down so that the guide can adjust itself to the correct spacing. Then tighten the M3 screws again. The distance between the front door and the machine can be adjusted on the left side by moving the locking bracket within its elongated holes. This bracket is located at the top left, at the rear of the pull-out module. The distance between the front door and the machine can be adjusted on the right side, after removal of the side cover, by moving the guide mounting bracket within its elongated holes. If the distance between the guides is adjusted correctly, the built-in gas-pressure spring should move the front door upwards by about 1/3 of its total travel. It should be easy to move the door the rest of the way by hand.

5/7.3 Adjusting the inlet nozzle The factory setting for the outlet cap is with the opening facing downwards. The opening should be turned 180 upwards for the “Tchibo Quick” chocolate product (easily pourable product).

Page 121: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/8 Maintenance

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-1

5/8 Maintenance

5/8.1 Industrial safety

5/8.1.1 Goggles The TZW Industrial Safety department has urged us once again to point out that for your own safety you should wear eye protection (goggles) when carrying out descaling.

5/8.1.2 Safety instructions Please ensure that you follow the instructions below when carrying out maintenance or repairs: The coffee machine must be disconnected from the mains.Before beginning any maintenance or repair work, first remove the mains plug from the socket or switch off the remote power switch and make sure the machine is currentless. The coffee machine must be depressurized.Before doing any work on the boiler or pipework, close the water inlet and open the dispensing valves or the safety valve and leave them open while carrying out the work. Electrical safety devices must be properly connected.Make sure that all safety devices provided (fuses, temperature limiter) are properly connected. It is not permissible to bridge or bypass safety devices. Safety valve functioning should be tested. Whenever you start up a machine, check the safety valves provided (excess pressure and ventilation). Operate them yourself and make sure they are not obstructed.

Page 122: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-2

Retrofitting, module feet If the drip tray projects over the edge of the mounting surface or is mounted on feet, the bracket 33 2121 4000 (see picture below) must be installed below the drip tray for safety reasons.

Caution! SAFETY RISK! If this bracket is not fitted, users may come into contact with wiring with only basic insulation.

5/8.2 General notes For the combiNation F, just as for all other machines, we recommend that maintenance be carried out every six months. At the latest, the first maintenance should be carried out after 25,000 litres of water have been used.

The maintenance activities and the maintenance sets are designed on the basis of the above period or amount of water.

Maintenance of the boiler and water system and of the valves should be carried out every 12,500 litres or every six months. Maintenance of the brewer and the storage urn should be carried out after a further 12,500 litres or a further six months.

This means that the boiler, water system and valves on the one hand, and the brewer and storage urn on the other hand, are each inspected every 25,000 litres.

The following list of maintenance activities does not include secondary tasks (such as removing and installing covers, greasing gaskets with silicone grease, greasing spindles and bearings with lubricating grease, mixing descaling and cleaning solutions).

Page 123: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/8 Maintenance

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-3

5/8.3 Maintenance schedule

Maintenance activities for combiNation F 12,500

litres25,000 litres

Preparations Check the functions of the machine (brewing cycles, coffee

output, hot water output). Check the function of the FM in the component test (required number of FM pulses). Read out the data (maintenance counters, errors, etc.). Back up the data.

x x

Water filter Check the replacement date of the water filter and the amount

of water filtered. Change the filter if necessary. x x

Machine Open and clean the machine. x x Inlet group

Check the pressure after the pressure-reduction valve. x Check the switching pressure of the pressure switch. x

BoilerOpen the safety valve. x Open the drain cock and vent the boiler by loosening the temperature sensor. Allow about 0.5 litres of water to run out. x

Open the boiler and descale it. CAUTION : THE DESCALING SOLUTION FOAMS QUICKLY

x

Check the condition of the heating elements and replace if necessary. x

Close and seal the boiler, using a new boiler gasket (tightening torque: 20 Nm) x

Open the water inlet and close the safety valve. Turn on the main switch. x

Start the descaling programme and wait until at least four cycles have been executed. x

Switch off the machine and turn off the main switch. Close the water-inlet valve. x

Open the safety valve. x Remove and clean the sieve on the hot water spout. Fit a new O-ring. x

Page 124: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-4

Maintenance activities for combiNation F, contd. 12,500 litres

25,000litres

Valves (not including drain and portioning valve) Open the hot water valve, the brewing valve, the inlet rinsing valve, the jet valve and the urn rinsing valve(s), install new pistons. Fit new O-rings, greasing them lightly before installation.

x

Check plug-in connectors for leaks and replace if necessary. x Open the water inlet and wait until water emerges from the safety valve. Then close the safety valve and check the machine for leaks.

x

Ground-coffee hopper and fan Empty the GCH and remove the feed auger. x

Remove any oily residue from the GCH with the aid of cleaning solution and assemble it again.

x

Clean the fan and the air duct. x

Brewer Remove the inlet funnel, the upper section, the cylinder and the brewing sieve. Descale the parts and then sock them in cleaning solution.

x

Replace the O-ring in the piston sleeve and check the piston for wear.

x

Check the drain holes in the piston sleeve (with the piston extended, the holes must be closed by the piston).

x

Replace the O-rings in the upper section and check the rinsing-ring gasket and the teeth on the rinsing ring for wear.

x

Replace the crank of the rinsing-ring drive, lubricating it with silicone oil if necessary.

x

Replace the sealing rings of the brewing cylinder. x Inspect the brewer sieve for damage and replace if necessary. x Clean the inside of the brewer and assemble the brewer again. x Lightly grease the guide rods and the piston rod. x

Storage urn, portioning and drain valves Open the urn and replace all gaskets in its cover. x Remove and descale the rinsing-water distribution plate. Replace the O-ring.

x

Inspect the probe(s) for damage. x Replace the gaskets on the drain valve and output valve. x Inspect the coffee pipes for dirt. If deposits are found, increase the amount of cleaner.

x

Assemble the storage urn and carry out urn alignment, checking for leaks at the same time.

x

Cleaning-granulate hopper Empty out the pellets and clean the portioner. x x

Page 125: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/8 Maintenance

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-5

Maintenance activities for combiNation F, contd. 12,500

litres25,000 litres

Cleaning-granulate hopper Empty out the pellets and clean the portioner. x x Machine

Assemble the machine and check its functions (laptop, test suite)

x x

Select "Machine data" in the Service programme. Enter the Service visit. Enter the maintenance activities. Enter the date for the next service visit. Check the other entries. Save the data in the Service memory (Service Customer)

x x

Switch to the "Service routines" and start the "First run up". x x Use the laptop to check for possible updates and install any which are found. Restore the backed-up data.

x x

Carry out the "Milk test": fill a cup with tea water and add milk or coffee-cream. If there is any acid left in the system, the milk will curdle.

x x

5/8.4 Chocolate dispenser maintenance schedule Maintenance cycles Maintenance is necessary once a year or after 100,000 cycles, together with the main machine.

Descale, Replace gaskets, Clean hopper and mixer.

5/8.5 Descaling Programme A descaling programme is available in the Service routines. This operates in a similar way to the descaling programme in the Programat 4 or Programat GV.

It is important to ensure that all acid residues are completely rinsed out of the machine after descaling.

The descaling programme runs in two blocks:

Seedescaling 5/8.5 Maintenance/ descaling programme part 5 “Service”

Page 126: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-6

Heat up the boiler to the set temperature Descaling/rinsing

(1) Storage urn is emptied. (2) Brewer moves to the idle position. (3) Hot water valve (and HW valve rear spout and HW valve chocolate

dispenser), urn rinsing valve, rinse inlet valve and fan are switched on. (4) Brewer moves to brewing position. (5) Machine brews 1 litre via the brewing valve and the jet valve through the

flow meter into the storage urn. (6) Coffee dispensing valve is switched on. (7) Storage urn is completely filled via the brewing valve and the jet valve

through the flow meter. (8) Coffee dispensing valve opens.(9) Brewer moves to rinsing position. (10) Brewer is rinsed out. (11) Brewer moves to the idle position. (12) Hot water valve (and HW valve rear spout and HW valve chocolate

dispenser), urn rinsing valve and urn drain valve are switched on.

Points 1-12 are repeated (5 times)

The two blocks, descaling/rinsing, will run through automatically five times. During the descaling process the boiler heats up. It takes up to 30 minutes for the boiler to be completely rinsed and descaled.

Page 127: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/8 Maintenance

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-7

5/8.6 Spare parts / Maintenance sets WMF combiNation F

5/8.6.1 Maintenance set, valves and boiler - 33 2756 7000 combiNation F: brewer/valve maintenance every 12,500 litres or every 6 months Part number Designation Quantity 33 2053 2000 Boiler gasket 1 33 0393 5000 O-ring 1 33 1551 2000 Piston for brewer valve 1 33 1508 7000 O-ring for brewer valve 1 33 1551 2000 Piston for jet valve 1 33 1508 7000 O-ring for jet valve 1 33 1551 2000 Piston for HW output valve 1 33 1508 7000 O-ring for HW output valve 1 33 1551 2000 Piston for rinsing valve 1 33 1508 7000 O-ring for rinsing valve 1

5/8.6.2 Maintenance set, storage urn/brewer – 33 2756 8000 CombiNation F: storage urn/brewer maintenance every 25,000 litres or every 12 months Part number Designation Quantity 33 0590 4000 O-ring for piston, brewer upper section 1 33 1584 8000 O-ring for piston, brewer upper section /funnel 1

33 0394 8000 O-rings, brewing and rinsing water, brewer upper section 2

33 0590 0000 Plastic ring for spray ring 1 33 0154 7000 Bearing for spray ring 1 33 1785 2099 Crank, complete 1 33 0590 1000 Gasket, brewer upper section/brewing cylinder 1 33 0363 7000 Gasket for brewing sieve 1 33 1542 9000 O-ring for sleeve 1 33 0393 3000 O-ring for probe 1 33 0394 4000 O-rings for screws 6 33 0395 4000 O-rings for inlet and drain nipples 2 33 2021 5000 Plug-in connector for water 1 33 2062 2000 Plug-in connector for coffee 1

33 1446 1000 Plug-in connector for rinsing water, glued in with 487704 1

33 2126 5000 Cover gasket 1 33 1454 8000 O-ring for rinsing-water distribution plate 1 33 2171 2000 Diaphragm for portioning and drain valves 2 33 1576 2000 O-ring for portioning and drain valves 2

Page 128: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-8

5/8.7 Troubleshooting

Symptom Cause RemedyMachine does not heat up although "Heating" is displayed.

The safety temperature limiter STB has been tripped.

Check the circuit-breaker and the temperature sensor.

Boiler cools down. Open-circuit in STB. Replace the STB. Boiler heats continuously until the STB trips.

Circuit-breaker or temperature sensor defective.

Replace the defective part.

Problems with the taste of the coffee

Pos Coffee… Possible cause(s)

1 tastes sour

Brewing time too short Mixing aperture in WMF water filter too small Too much mixing water added (filter coffee) Brewing temperature too low

2 tastes bitter

Too much ground coffee Mixing aperture in WMF water filter too small Coffee ground too finely Brewing time too long Not enough mixing water added (filter coffee)

3 tastes weak

Brewing temperature too low Brewing time too short Not enough ground coffee Too much mixing water added (filter coffee)

4 tastesrancid

Machine dirty Ground coffee too old

5 tastes burnt Brewing temperature too high Brewing time too long

6 tastes of chemicals

Residues of cleaning solution in the system due to scale depositsGaskets too old (insufficient maintenance) Coffee residues in the brewing system (insufficient cleaning)

Page 129: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/8 Maintenance

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-9

5/8.8 Error list

1 = Must be acknowledged 2 = Entry in the machine error memory 3 = Entry in the laptop error memory No. Description Display 1.) 2.) 3.) Cause or remarks

0 Pulse error in portioner 1 Pulses, Port. 1 X X No pulse for >1 sec.

2 Pulse error in portioner 2 Pulses, Port. 2 X X No pulse for >1 sec.

10 Pulse error in FM 1 Pulses, FM 1 X X No pulse for >10 sec. during brewing; No pulse for >16 sec. during cleaning

12Water-flow error, Brewing time exceeded

Brewing time ! X X Depends on brewing quantity and brewing purpose (cleaning,...)

14 Positioning error, brewer motor 1

Position, BrMot.1 X X Not positioned within 3 seconds

16 Current error, brewer motor 1

Current, BrMot.1 X X

28 General current error Current, general X X 37 No node found No node found X X

38 General error, CAN-OPEN

CAN dialogue error X X

39 Boiler overtemperature Boiler overtemp. X X

40 Boiler temperature-sensor error

Boiler temp. Sensor X X

41 Boiler heating time Boiler heating time X X

44Urn1 calibration error Urn1 must be calibrated

X X Level table cannot be corrected automatically or is not strictly monotonous (calibration required!)

45 Urn1 probe error Urn1 probe X X Probe value < 37 or > 235 digits

46 Soya Urn1 Empty Message

Soya Urn 1 Please refill Fill factor lower than the threshold

value

47Urn2 calibration error Urn2 must be calibrated

X X Level table cannot be corrected automatically or is not strictly monotonous (calibration required!)

48 Urn2 probe error Urn2 probe X X Probe value < 37 or > 235 digits

49 Soya Urn2 Empty Message

Soya Urn 2 Please refill Fill factor lower than the threshold

value

53 Cleaning necessary Please clean machine First information (after 26h)

54 Cleaning count-down Forced cleaning due Second information (after 50h)

55 Forced cleaning Cleaningnecessary! Third and last information (after 51h)

61 Standby X Counted with pressure on/off 62 Reset! X

Page 130: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-10

1 = Must be acknowledged 2 = Entry in the machine error memory 3 = Entry in the laptop error memory No. Description Display 1.) 2.) 3.) Cause or remarks

63 Portioner 1 EMPTY Fill ground-coffee hopper 1 X

64 Portioner 2 EMPTY Fill ground-coffee hopper 2 X

67 Portioner 5 EMPTY

Fill chocolate-powder hopper M5 Confirm here

X

68 Grounds catcher removed

Empty and replace grounds container

69 Empty grounds container

Empty and replace grounds container

72 Manual input open Please closemanual input

74 Door switch (front door up, cleaning)

Slide front door down

76 Water pressure Please open shut-off valve X Counted with pressure on/off

78 Lime-filter reminder Replace WMF water filter X

87 Waterpressure not constant!

Waterpressure not constant! X X X If during a brewing cycle the

waterpressure is not constant. 90 Maintenance reminder Servicing is due X

91 Brewer maintenance reminder

Brewermaintenance is due!

X

92 Descaling necessary Descaling is due! X

99 Urn1 storage time exceeded

Urn1 storage time exceeded

100 Urn2 storage time exceeded

Urn2 storage time exceeded

102 Cleaning due within 5 minutes

Machinecleaning starts within 5 minutes

Timer cleaning

103 Machine OFF within 10 minutes

Machine will switch off within 10 minutes

Timer machine off

104 Timer Error Timer report Error realized X X X

118 Fifo cleared X X 119 Errors to RAM X X 120 Errors to flash X X

133 Granulate hopper empty

Granulate hopper empty. Please fill.

X X

134 Granulate motor jammed

Granulate motor jammed X X X

135 Cleaning executed with too few granules X X

Page 131: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/8 Maintenance

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-11

1 = Must be acknowledged 2 = Entry in the machine error memory 3 = Entry in the laptop error memory No. Description Display 1.) 2.) 3.) Cause or remarks

136 Cleaning aborted Cleaning aborted Execute again! X X X

137

GCH time limit 1 (depending on amount of ground coffee)

GCH1 time limit X X GCH was switched off by time limit instead of by pulses

138 GCH time limit 2 (fixed time limit) GCH2 time limit X X GCH activated for more than 25 seconds

139 GCH module error (module should not run)

GCH module error X X GCH runs although no portioning is requested.

140 Valve limit time (general)

Valve limit time general X X

143 Dosing is blocked because machine is brewing

Please wait, brewing is running Selected Product can’t be dispensed.

145 Storagetime Urn reached

Storagetime reached!

149 Limit time for draining Urn1

Limit time for draining urn 1 X X X

Draining urn takes more than 130 Sek. Ringstorage info (empty reason): 1: Heat flush 2: manual take out 3: after neutralization brewing 4: Test 5: Cleaning entry 6: Cleaning cycle 7: Cleaning cycle cancelled 8: Urn calibration 9: Machine starts

150 Limit time for draining Urn2

Limit time for draining urn 2 X X X Draining urn takes more than

130 Sek

151 Limit time for hot water output valve

Limit time, HW output valve X X X Valve open longer than 120 sec.

152 Limit time for inlet rinsing valve

Limit time, inlet rinsing valve X X X Valve open longer than 30 sec.

153 Limit time for urn1 rinsing valve

Limit time, urn1 rinsing valve X X X Valve open longer than 240 sec.

154 Limit time for urn2 rinsing valve

Limit time, urn2 rinsing valve X X X Valve open longer than 240 sec.

155 Limit time for urn1 mixing valve

Limit time, urn1 mixing valve X X X Valve open longer than 240 sec.

156 Limit time for urn2 mixing valve

Limit time, urn2 mixing valve X X X Valve open longer than 240 sec.

157 Limit time for brewing valve

Limit time, Brewing valve X X X Valve open longer than 500 sec.

158 Limit time for outlet rinsing valve

Limit time, Outlet rinsing valve

X X X Valve open longer than 30 sec.

159 Limit time for grounds ejector valve

Limit time, grounds valve X X X Valve open longer than 40 sec.

Page 132: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/8-12

1 = Must be acknowledged 2 = Entry in the machine error memory 3 = Entry in the laptop error memory No. Description Display 1.) 2.) 3.) Cause or remarks

162 Front-door position unknown

Move door fully up or down Front door not fully up or fully down

172 Accounting node not found!

Cannot find accounting X

178 Grounds catcher emptied? (if removed)

Grounds catcher emptied? X Must be acknowledged with Yes or No

179 Grounds catcher emptied? (if full)

Grounds catcher emptied? X Must be acknowledged with Yes or No

181 Attached device must be cleaned

Clean attached device X Chocolate dispenser

182 Front door of attached device open

Attached device: front door open X Front door of chocolate dispenser must be

closed

188 Emergency cleaninginfotext

Manual Cleaning Cycle active X

After the granulate motor is blocked twice, machine switches to the manual cleaning cycle. Every time after a cleaning cycle and after switching on the machine, there is this information at the Display.

189 Soya pump 1 cleaningnecessary

Soya pump 1 Cleaning

190 Soya pump 2 cleaningnecessary

Soya pump 2 cleaning

Acknowledgment texts

Customer display After pressing ReasonService due Inform service engineer!

Press [OK] to clear. Brewer maintenance is due! Inform service engineer!

Press [OK] to clear. Grounds catcher emptied? Have you really emptied the

container? Please confirm After inserting the grounds container

Please open shut-off valve This event cannot be acknowledged!

No water pressure at pressure switch

Change WMF water filter Inform service engineer! Press [OK] to clear.

Value stored in machine data has been exceeded

Fill ground-coffee hopper 1 Is the hopper full? Please confirm

Granulate hopper empty Is the hopper full? Please confirm

Granulate motor jammed Acknowledge?

Page 133: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/9 Installing retrofit modules

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-1

5/9 Installing retrofit modules

5/9.1 Installing the „choc connection” retrofit moduleThe combiNation S to which a chocolate dispenser is to be fitted may be either of two versions.

The harness and the tubes may already be fitted if the “Choc connection” module was also ordered for the machine via the Export Department (possible since the beginning of April 2002). The pre-installed tubes and the fitted harness are located in the area behind/below the grounds shaft. If this is the case, the steps marked * can be omitted.

If the “Choc connection” module was not integrated with the machine at the factory, the additional module 33.3307.6000 should be retrofitted.

5/9.1.1 Instructions including fitting the harness

Before starting work, be sure to unplug the mains power supply, depressurise the boiler and close the stop valve in the supply line to the machine.

(1) Remove the design side panel at the right (2) *Dismantle the GCH boiler cover (3) *Dismantle the power stage (4) *Break out the rectangular opening and deburr with a file

Fig. 1 Break out openings and deburr

The combiNation chocolate dispenser is screwed to these keyholes later (see point 9).Appropriate bolts are supplied. 1 keyhole is concealed; 3 bolts are sufficient.

Page 134: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-2

(5) *Detach the two power stage tabs (Fig. 2) and push through and down.

Fig. 2 Front view:

Outtaken power stage

Rear view: taps

(6) Carefully pass the harness (Fig. 3) with the small tabs lengthways through the round openings from the combiNation towards the chocolate dispenser, taking care not to damage the strands. Fit bushings or edge protection.

Fig. 3

Carefully pass tabs through the rectangular openings from the combiNation S towards the chocolate dispenser.

(7) * Attach the two tabs of the retrofit harness between the power stage and the main cable form. Note the fitting position (see Figs. 4 and 5). Screw tab of adapter harness to power stage side. Secure with cable clips on the main cable form side (Figs. 4 and 5).

Important: do not confuse the tabs.

Page 135: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/9 Installing retrofit modules

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-3

Fig. 4

Adapter harness tabs

Fig. 5 Top side of power stage is 24 V area.

This is where the harness with the white/red and clear strands goes.

Adapter harness tabs

Secure both tabs with cable clips

The bottom of power stage is 5 V area. This is where the harness with the red and white-grey strands goes.

(8) Screw on chocolate dispenser, using screws and appropriate bolts. (9) Plug in harness in chocolate dispenser.(10) Lead the 230 V wire from the chocolate dispenser to the auxiliary

machine terminal (next to pressure controller on inside right wall of combiNation S) and connect.

Fig. 6 The 230 V terminal in the

combiNation F is located on the right side panel at the top front

It is essential to check again at this point that the boiler / water system is depressurised.

Page 136: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-4

(11) Remove the elbow from the boiler hot water dispenser (Fig. 7) and fit a T plug connection in its place. Insert aperture nipple and insert plug connection extension and hose to the HW valve on the chocolate dispenser.

Fig. 7 T-piece

Aperture nipple

Plug connection (extension)

Hose to choc. HW valve

(12) Route the hot water hose to the chocolate dispenser hot water valve. (13) As the chocolate dispenser cold water valve is not needed when

connected to the combiNation F, dismantle the connection between the HW valve and the cold water valve. The elbow should be fitted on to the HW valve(Figs. 8 and 9)

Fig. 8 Dismantle T-piece and hose.

Fig. 9 Hot water valve correctly connected up

Fit elbow on to exposed HW connection

HW hose from combiNation F boiler

Page 137: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/9 Installing retrofit modules

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-5

(14) Open water feed and switch on power. Check machines for any leaks. (15) Use “ConfigTool” to run up the software version cs_fb_02.00.01 or later

on the front panel and software cs_(lst_01_03_01 or laler) on the power stage. If SE (serial extension) is implemented, run up the cs_se_01_03_01 version or later.

(16) Software settings: -In the machine data, register the chocolate dispenser under ‘Auxiliary Machine’. -In the service routines, under “Schok-Abgleich” (= choc. adjustment), the chocolate dispenser water temperature can be checked and adjusted with the aid of the adjustable aperture (at front of mixer assembly). Note TV 10.2.1. -In the service routines, carry out P5 adjustment (this requires a large cup and a set of scales).-Product quantities can be set up either via the product configuration function on the laptop or via the usual programs on the machine itself.

(17) Replace the Design side panel in position.

Page 138: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-6

Page 139: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/9 Installing retrofit modules

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-7

5/9.2 Installation of serial extension / installation of waiter lock

The SE and Waiter Lock retrofit modules are installed in the CombiNation for connection to MC3, MC Can or ISB.

The SE retrofit module (33.3303.1000) comprise the SE assembly, fixing angle and fixing material.

The waiter lock retrofit module (33.3307.7000) contains the waiter lock, fixing angle, drip tray, waiter lock cable and fixing material.

The SE is installed behind the grounds collector. The interconnection angle with the interface plug is fastened to the side edge below the right-hand grinder.

In the case of the waiter lock, the conversion kit contains a new drip tray with a hole. The waiter lock is fastened with an angle.

Preliminaries: Dismantle conche panel Lift off drip tray and remove hoppers

Page 140: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-8

5/9.2.1 Installation of SE

MDB extension

8-price card reader extension

SE board

The accounting unit (SE) is mounted beside the power stage.

power supply

ISB connection

Connect CAN connection plug to power stage

Cut-out for waiter lock

Page 141: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/9 Installing retrofit modules

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-9

Installation of waiter lock

Angle for fasten to weld-on bolts.

Install waiter lock and lead cable to right-hand wall. Pass waiter lock cable through thelower cable bushing and attach to lower plug (X1) on SE

Fit SE cover and reassemble machine parts. (Make machine ready for operation).Connect laptop and carry out update, if necessary. Follow instructions for the settings.

For settings refer to chapter 4/9.2.1 Serial Accounting part 4“Software”

Page 142: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/9-10

Page 143: Training Manual CombiNationF

5/10 Important infos

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/10-1

5/10 Important infos

5/10.1 Year 2002

Germany TE2002_25130 Frontpanel new combiNation TE2002_30130 combiNation F Granulatedispencer TE2002_33130 Upgrade Chok an combiNation F TE2002_34130 combiNation Shock Absorber new TE2002_35130 combiNation F mounting Shock Absorber TE2002_36130 Software 02_00_01 combiNation F TE2002_44130 Power Stage combiNation

5/10.2 Year 2003

Germany

TE2003_18 combiNation_F_Update_Konfig. Tool TE2003_19 combiNation_F_Valves_New_Material TE2003_22 All over_Plunger_Modification Te2003_25 Grounds Seperator_039011_Sensor_right side TE2003_36 combiNation_SB_sign_ HW_Dispensing TE2003_38 combiNation_F_Version_03_00_01 TE2003_39 combiNation_F_Dispensing Valve ExportExport_Info_2003-30 CNF_Dosier_Discharge Valve Unit Export_Info_2003-32 combiNation_F_Version_03_00_01_D Export_Info_2003-33 combiNation_F_KonfigTool_MKF3_0_1_2_D

5/10.3 Year 2004

Germany

TE2004_05 combiNation_F_Baseground_at_Storage Urn

Page 144: Training Manual CombiNationF

Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

5/10-2

Page 145: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/0 Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/0-1

Part 4 - Software

4/1 Software user guide

4/2 Software overview

4/3 Coffee storage

4/4 Timer selection

4/5 Cleaning

4/6 Settings

4/7 PIN input

4/8 Rights - authorisations/PIN

4/9 Accounting

4/10 Manual dispensing

4/11 Information

4/12 Service

4/13 Brewing sequences

4/14 Hot water dispensing

4

Page 146: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/0-2

Page 147: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/1 Software user guide

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/1-1

4/1 Software user guide

4/1.1 User guide

User guidance for the machine is provided on the touch-screen display. When the machine is in the ready state, the display on the right or the display for the selected storage mode (in this case, for example: storage mode "half full" with 1.9 litres of coffee in the storage urn) is shown. However, this does not apply if the coffee machine is in self-service mode. In this case, a large cup is displayed instead of the storage urn.

Pressing anywhere on the unused part of the display causes the additional symbol , with which information about the machine can be retrieved, to be displayed. If a error is currently active, the symbol is displayed. If the customer does not want error messages to be displayed in self-service mode, only the following display will appear when an error message is active.

Pressing opens the second level, a selection menu.If access rights (PIN numbers) have been assigned, the machine prompts you for your PIN when you press . Enter your PIN. If this is correct, the selection menu is then displayed. In this selection menu you can – depending on your access rights – set or change various values. The various menu items are described in the following sections:

See„PIN input” and “Acess rights” chapter 4/8 and 4/9

SeeService - machine datas Chapter 4/12.2.2

For the functions, see Chapter 4/2 Software overview

Page 148: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/1-2

4/1.2 Legend to button fields

The following soft buttons are available for menu operation.

Feld

OK Confirm or start a step, or save settings

Exit Back to previous menu level, or quit without saving

The button is generally used to delete or clear.

Info Context-sensitive help or additional information is available here

UpDown

Up one page in lists. Down one page in lists.

ForwardBack

These soft buttons are used to scroll forward or back in dialogues comprising more than one page (e.g. product settings).

Testing products, quantities of ground coffee or water in the Product Setting menu.

As a rule, the current setting is displayed here inverted.

When a soft button is pressed, as well as the audible acknowledgement there is also a visual one. The button is briefly displayed inverted.

Page 149: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/1 Software user guide

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/1-3

4/1.3 General notes on the dialogues

4/1.3.1 Setting options

4/1.3.2 Setting numeric values

Description of the marks on the bar graph

Factory setting

Customer setting

Accept changes

Discardchanges

Current customer

setting

Service setting

Factory setting

Customer value before

change

Current selection

Discardchanges

Accept changes

Service setting

min. value

max. value

Current customer

setting

Factory setting

Page 150: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/1-4

Page 151: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/2 Software overview

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

4/2-1

4/2 Software overview

4/2.1 Functions in the selection menu

Functions in the selection menu Function selection See Chapter

Coffee storage Preselection quantities 4/3

Timer status (ON/OFF) 4/4

Timer adjustment Short cut to "Set timer setting"

Timer selection (locked if a Setting-PIN is asigned) Timer Table

Delete Timer Timer Info Machine - with power-off

- without power-off 4/5CleaningChocolat dispenser Product data 4/12.2.1 Machine data 4/12.2.2 Component test 4/12.2.3 Service routines 4/12.2.4 Service Information 4/12.2.5

Service

Accountment 4/12.2.6 Product settings: (selected with product button) 4/6.1 Set with or Sample/test with Coffee quantity Hot water quantity Product selection Machine settings: 4/6.2 Operating mode (Self-service) Amount of ground coffee Boiler temperature First Run Up 4/6.2 Set timer programm 4/6.3 Setting the date and time 4/6.4

Set

Setting Contrast 4/6.5

Page 152: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/2-2

Functions in the selection menu Function selection

SeeChapter

PIN input Input of the PIN 4/7

(Enable)remote control

(Administration of) access rights For the levels: cleaning / setting / accounting

4/8

AccountingNon-clearable counter or clearable counter or MC accounting

4/9

Manual dispensingTap out 1 product free All free

4/10

Machine Info Type (i.e. combiNation F2) Software version Timer information: Timer status (ON/OFF) Next Timer action

Info(Appears by lightly tapping a blank area.)

Brewing time (last brewing cycle)

4/11

Page 153: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/3 Coffee storage

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/3-1

4/3 Coffee storage

In self-service mode, the "Storage" function can be accessed by pressing in the selection menu.

Pressing activates the menu for quantity preselection. The machine remains ready to brew and dispense coffee. In the quantity preselection menu, the available quantities are displayed as symbols. The functions of the menu are described below. Pressing immediately starts a brewing cycle. The maximum batch which the storage urn can accept is brewed. (High-speed: this settings is enabled by Service.) Pressing (possible only if is preselected) initiates a single brewing cycle for 1 litre of coffee

Display combiNation F2

See“High-speed brewing“ Machine Datas 4/11.

Page 154: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/3-2

4/3.1 Preselection quantities The storage urn(s) is/are filled with the selected quantity of coffee by execution of one or more brewing cycles. On a double coffee machine, each storage urn is filled with the selected quantity.

Stand-By (zero litres) This preselection switches of the automatic quantity control. Any coffee still in the storage urn is dispensed until the portioning cut-off level of 0.5 litre is reached. The remaining coffee can be dispensed manually.

1 litre, manual Brewing batch: 1 litre Jet brewing Re-brewing threshold None, i.e. the user initiates brewing when

requested to do so. Portioning cut-off a) < 0.5 litre in storage urn b) During brewing Initial brewing cycle 1 x 1 litre

Half-fullBrewing batch: 1 litre Jet brewing Re-brewing threshold <1.5 litre Portioning cut-off a) < 1.0 litre in storage urn b) During brewing, after addition of water, when

only the brewing valve is active. Initial brewing cycle 1 x 2 litres

Full, economical Brewing batch: 2 litres Jet brewing Re-brewing threshold <2.1 litre Portioning cut-off a) < 1.0 litre in storage urn b) During brewing, after addition of water, when

only the brewing valve is active. Initial brewing cycle 2 x 2 litres

The ECO preselection can be switched off by means of the Config tool, machine configuration, storage urn page.

FullBrewing batch: 2 litres Jet brewing; brewing is complete after

addition of water. Re-brewing threshold <2.1 litre Portioning cut-off < 1.0 litre in storage urn Initial brewing cycle 2 x 2 litres

Page 155: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/3 Coffee storage

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/3-3

High-speed brewing If high-speed brewing is enabled in the machine data, brewing into the storage urn can be initiated directly with the appropriate button on the touch-screen display. The maximum batch which the storage urn can accept is brewed. The preselected quantity must be greater than zero and the storage urn must be capable of accepting at least one litre of coffee.

Page 156: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/3-4

Page 157: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/4 Timer selection

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/4-1

4/4 Timer selection

The timer handles routine tasks such as switching the machine on and off, preselecting the quantities for the storage urn, initiating cleaning of the machine or switching to self-service mode. Manual actions executed with the button switch or on the touch-screen display are executed with the same priority as the timer actions. The timer is a weekly timer and up to 16 switching actions can be programmed for each day of the week.

If you programme the timer to switch the machine off at a certain time and a cleaning operation is running at this time, the machine is not switched off until the cleaning operation has been completed. Changes to the preselected quantities for storage are effective with the machine switched off. The preselected quantities for storage remain stored even when the machine is switched off. Brewing of coffee is disabled 5 minutes before the start of a timer-programmed cleaning operation.

Pressing the timer button in the selection menu causes the following to be displayed.

If a setting PIN has been allocated, only the Timer status OFF or ON can be selected here. The setting PIN must be input in order to access all the other options.

The sub-menus are described in the following sections.

Page 158: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/4-2

4/4.1 Timer status (ON/OFF) Timer status (ON/OFF) If the timer is activated (timer status ON), the actions programmed for the various times are executed by the machine.

Activation of the timer is indicated by a clock symbol on the display.

4/4.2 Setting the timer

To simplify use of the timer, the various settings can be selected from this display. The header of the display changes when you switch to other actions (operating time, cleaning, preselected quantities, self-service mode).

The column with the heading "Day" identifies the day of the week, where 1 means Monday, 2 means Tuesday, etc. and 1-5 means Monday to Friday and 1-7 the entire week. Touching this field displays the name of the day, with the selected day marked.

The column with the heading "Action" is used to select the various machine functions. Touching this field displays the name of the function, with the selected function marked.

This function is only possible via the setting PIN, if allocated. See 4/4

Page 159: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/4 Timer selection

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/4-3

The following actions can be selected for the currently selected time:

Setting the operating time Switch the machine ON or OFF

Setting the cleaning mode Cleaning with power-off Cleaning without power-off

Setting the preselected quantities Change the preselected quantity

Activating self-service mode Switch to self-service mode

The column with the heading "Prg" shows the 16 switching times for each day. A fully programmed switching time is accepted by pressing the "OK" button. The switching times are displayed in chronological order.

4/4.3 Copying functions between days

A completely programmed daily sequence can be copied easily to another day. To do this, select the function "Copy day" and the day to be copied. The programmed sequence is copied into the buffer. You are then prompted with the message "Insert day" to enter the day to which the information is to be copied. Pressing the "C" button deletes a switching time and the hours and minutes values are cleared. The switching times are sorted in chronological order when you exit from the timer function.

This function is only possible via the setting PIN, if allocated. See 4/4

Page 160: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/4-4

This function is only possible via the setting PIN, if allocated. See 4/4

4/4.4 Timer overview The timer information button displays the selected timer overview.

You can select an overview of the operating times or of the preselected coffee quantities.

4/4.5 Clearing the timer

By selecting the appropriate entry, you can clear all switching times for a day, for all working days or for the entire week.

In the main display, you can display the next action programmed for the timer by pressing the button with the information symbol.

Page 161: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/5 Cleaning

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/5-1

4/5 Cleaning Due to their particular importance, the cleaning modes and cleaning programs are described in a separate chapter. An overview is provided below.

Cleaning

3/1 General information on cleaning

3/1.1 Daily cleaning

3/2 Cleaning the machine

3/2.1 Fully-automatic cleaning

3/2.2 Semi-automatic cleaning

3/2.3 Timer-controlled cleaning

SeeCleaning - Part 3

Page 162: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/5-2

Page 163: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/6 Settings

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/6-1

4/6 Settings The machine is ready, with the display on shown the right or the display for the selected storage stage visible: Press to switch to the second level, the selection menu, where the settings can be entered.

To set the coffee products, press in the selection menu.

The menu shown on the right is now displayed. Select what you want to set. The available selections are product settings, machine settings, first run up, the timer programme, date and time and setting the contrast of display.

4/6.1 Setting the products

4/6.1.1 Setting the coffee and hot water quantities

Pressing Products opens the Submenu"Product settings".

The display changes to:

Press the product button on the control panel for the product whose settings you want to enter or change.

Page 164: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/6-2

The setting mode for the selected product (inthis example: Cup of coffee) is now activated. The first option is to change the amount of hot water.To change the amount of coffee or hot water, press .

The display changes to: Press or to change the amount of coffee or hot water from its current setting. The change is displayed both graphically and as a percentage.

You can start a test output at any time by pressing . This permits you to check the selected setting. The display then changes to:

Pressing Cup Coffee initiates the test output

If there is no coffee in the storage urn, the following message is displayed:

Press to accept the changes you have made or press to exit from the setting menu without saving the changes.

Pressing displays the next screen of the setting menu.

Page 165: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/6 Settings

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/6-3

4/6.1.2 Product selection

By pressing Product,you can allocate the displayed product to one of the product buttons on the control panel.

The display shown on the right now appears. This list contains all of the standard product settings which can be allocated to the various product buttons.

If you change the product selection, the individual settings are overwritten by the default settings for the selected product (factory settings)! If you only want to change the values set for a product button to which a product is already allocated, skip this step.

To assign a new product name to a product button on the control panel, press the field with the desired product designation in the list.

Pressing exits from the setting menu without saving the changes.

Page 166: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/6-4

4/6.2 Machine settings

4/6.2.1 Operating mode (self-service)

Press Operating Mode in the selection menu

The display changes to:

If you wish to operate the coffee machine as a self-service machine, press SelfServ. Mode. In the next display, confirm your selection by pressing .

In self-service mode, the following display appears immediately instead of the empty storage urn:

Page 167: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/6 Settings

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/6-5

4/6.2.2 Amount of ground coffee

Press Machine in the setting menu.

The display changes to:

Press Coffeepowder to open the display shown on the right:

Select the brewing batch for which the amount of ground coffee is to be set. Example: 1 Litre . The display changes to:

Press or to change the amount of ground coffee from the current setting. The change is displayed graphically and also as a percentage. The setting may be changed by up to about +/-50%.

4/6.2.3 Boiler temperature

Press Temperature in the setting menu.

The display changes to:

Press or to change the boiler temperature from the current setting. The change is displayed graphically and also as a percentage. The setting may be changed by up to about +/-3°C.

Page 168: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/6-6

See”Timer selection” Chapter 4/6.4

4/6.3 First Run Up This allows the customer to restart the machine via the software. The only difference from the First Run Up in the SERVICE program is that forced cleaning is not reset.

4/6.4 Setting the timer This allows the customer to access and set the Timer program. For functions and a description, see chapter 4/4 “Timer selection”.

4/6.5 Setting the date and timeThe machine is ready, with the display on shown the right or the display for the selected storage stage visible: Press to switch to the second level, the selection menu, where the setings can be entered.

If access rights (PIN numbers) have been assigned, the machine prompts you for your PIN when you press . Enter your PIN. If this is correct, the selection menu is then displayed.

If you want to change the currently displayed date and time, press .

Press Time/Date in the setting menu.

SeeAccess rights (PIN numbers)

Page 169: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/6 Settings

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/6-7

You can now change the date (day, month, year, day of week) and the time (hours, minutes) individually by pressing or . After changing the settings, you must confirm them by pressing . Pressing exits from the menu without saving the changes.

4/6.6 Contrast This allows the display contrast to be adjusted. The default value is 70 %.

Page 170: Training Manual CombiNationF
Page 171: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/7 PIN input

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

4/-1

4/7 PIN input Setting the PIN numbers:

: menu „Access control“ Buttons are displayed for each level with the PIN number currently set

Accounting 0000 Setting 0000 Cleaning 0000

PIN numbers are set via the usual PIN dialog. The number input is shown in clear.

Now if the user sets a PIN for one level and no PIN has yet been allocated for the higher levels, that PIN is accepted for the higher levels. For example: PIN for the “Settings” level is then also accepted for the „Accounting“ level.

If the user cancels the PIN number for one level (input PIN ‘0000’), the PIN numbers for the lower levels are thus also cancelled.

Page 172: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

4/7-2

Page 173: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/8 Rights PIN

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/8-1

4/8 Rights - authorisations/PIN The combiNation F access authorisation system limits access to the Selection menu if required. There are a total of 6 levels of access authorisation:

Designation Content Info Generally accessible information, not protected by a

PINCleaning Cleaning, setting the milk froth quality, selecting

Timer mode Setting Machine and product settings Accounting Accounting, manual dispensing, PIN number

allocation/access rights Service*) Service mode

*) It is not possible to set a PIN number for Service level.

The Service engineer can use the Config Tool to set extended PINs, for example a PIN giving access to a non-clearable unit accounting counter. Whole menus can also be blocked.

A specific PIN number can be allocated for levels 1 to 3. Levels with the same PIN are treated as the same. If the PIN number “0000” is allocated, no PIN will be requested for the corresponding level and access is unrestricted (Level 1 as a rule).

PIN numbers are hierarchical. That means for instance that the PIN number for Level 2 is also valid for Level 1, but not for Level 3. The Service PIN allows access to all levels.

The PIN number for Service (Service PIN) should never be revealed! This PIN number opens up the setting options to parameters that should not be accessible to the customer or coffee firm representatives. The Service PIN is stored on file by the Service Manager.

Page 174: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/8-2

Page 175: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/8 Accounting

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/9-1

4/9 Accounting

4/9.1 Unit without accounting facility

Clearable counter Touching a line selects it. This line can then be cleared by touching the key “C”. If no line is selected, touching the key “C” resets the complete daily counter.

Non-clearable counter The Clear key “C” is not implemented. The counter cannot be cleared.

4/9.2 Unit with accounting facility Select Accounting in the customer menu. Depending on the version of the coffee machine, the appropriate display appears.

4/9.2.1 Serial

Debit amounts outstanding and unused credits are displayed here.

4/9.2.2 Multicounter (MC) (to be provided later)

See”Rights – authorisations PIN” Chapter 4/7

Page 176: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/9-2

Page 177: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/10 Manual dispensing

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/10-1

4/10 Manual dispensing

4/10.1 Machines without accounting/vending machines Any amount of coffee can be dispensed from the storage urn(s) without accounting with the aid of the manual dispensing button. The storage urn(s) can be completely emptied.

Products dispensed in the above manner are not recorded.

4/10.2 Machines with accounting/vending machines Machines with accounting and vending machines have the buttons "All free" and "Next product free" in addition to the button "Drain urn".

Selecting the button "All free" disables the accounting. This can be used, for example, by the service engineer when setting up the machine.

Selecting the button "Next product free" disables accounting for the next product which is dispensed. This can be used, for example, for dispensing a pot of coffee for the "boss". Accounting is enabled again after the product has been dispensed.

We strongly recommend that this function be protected against unauthorised use by assigning an accounting PIN to it.

Products dispensed in the above manner are not recorded.

Page 178: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/10-2

Page 179: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/11 Information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/11-1

4/11 Information

4/11.1 Customer information key When the touch screen is pressed in an area not allocated to a key, an additional information key pops up ( ).

It disappears again after about 10 seconds.

Pressing this key opens a menu that provides the customer with basic information about the machine. On a self-service machine, the Information key is protected by the cleaning PIN, if allocated.

Select function Main menu Sub menu Information

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 Machine Info 2 Timer Info 3 Brew Times

“Timer” is only shown if active and implemented.

Page 180: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/11-2

4/11.2 Service *Contact address for the local Service Engineer. Five lines each of 15 characters can be filled up as required. This display only appears if data have been stored. data can only be programmed by means of the Config tool.

*Date next scheduled maintenance is due. Maximum number of brewing cycles until next maintenance.If this is exceeded, negative values will be shown.

*Date next scheduled filter replacement is due. Maximum flow until next filter replacement. If this is exceeded, negative values will be shown.

*Software versions of nodes detected.

4/11.3 Timer

Current timer status

* The english displays are not available for the chapter 4/11.2 to 4/11.4.

Page 181: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-1

4/12 Service

4/12.1 Access to Service Entry to the Service function is accessible in the Selection menu via the Service soft button after inputting the Service PIN.

4/12.2 Service - overview

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Line Select function page 1 Select function page 2 Select function page 3 1 Product data Service routines 2 Machine data Service info 3 Components Accounting

Page 182: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-2

4/12.2.1 Service - Product data

The Product data, such as portioning quantities and the amount of ground coffee for brewing, can be set easily in customer mode. Service mode permits further settings.

For the portioning: Portioning variants For the brewings: General, brewing, jet water

4/12.2.1.1 Entry to setting portioning and brewing

Starting from the menu: press Product data

Setting portioning Setting brewing Press the dispensing button. The selected product can be set.

Press “Select Prod.”

The following can be selected under “General”:

RecipePortioning quantity Portioning option

Door mode* Product text

* see “Door switch” Controls in Part 2, Engineering

Select the desired brewing cycle:

The “large” hot water portioning options can only be accessed via the “Select Prod.” function.

Example: 1 Ltr Brew Urn selected

See“Settingproduct data“ Operating instructions - Part 8

Page 183: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-3

Setting portioning – general

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Product data Portioning

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Recipe Door mode* 2 Portioning quantity Product text 3 Portioning option

The individual brewing settings can be selected only via the function "Select product".

Different entry to portioning and brewing See 4/12.2.1.1 “Entry to setting portioning and brewing”

Setting brewing - general

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 1. Portioner 2 2. Portioner 3

Setting brewing - brewing

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Product data Brewing

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Qty. Ground Coffee 2 Qty. Water 3

Seedoor mode ”controls” Part 2 - Engineering

Page 184: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-4

Setting brewing - jet water

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Product data Jet

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Mixing Time 2 3

Page 185: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-5

4/12.2.2 Service - machine data

The main menu "Machine data" is opened from the Service main menu

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 Counter Service Date Grounds Catcher 2 Cleaning Maintenance counter Storage Urn 3 Error List Filter replace Boiler

Line Main menu page 4 Main menu page 5 Main menu page 6 1 Accessory Unit Double Click 2 Accounting Standards 3 Self-service mode

4/12.2.2.1 Counters

The following counter values are displayed: Total brewing cycles, portioning of coffee and hot water (separately), the brewing 1 litre, 2L ECO, 2L and the operating time.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Counters

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Total Brewing Hotwater 2L Eco brewing 2 Total Dosing Chocolate 2L brewing 3 Coffee 1 litre brewing Operating Time

Page 186: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-6

See“error list“ Part 5 – “Service”

4/12.2.2.2 Cleaning

The number of cleaning cycles (actual and planned) is displayed and can be reset.The time until deactivation and until the request for cleaning can be selected. Forced cleanings, automatic cleanings, Neutralisation.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Cleaning

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3

1 Cleanings Actual Compulsory Cleaning Neutralzsation 2 Cleanings Must Automatic Cleaning 3 Cleaning Mode Granulate

4/12.2.2.3 Error list This function displays the Error list and permits the entire error memory or individual errors to be deleted.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Error List

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Error text 1 2 Error text 2 3 etc.

Error text 1 Error text 2 etc.

Page 187: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-7

4/12.2.2.4 Service date This displays the time for the next maintenance request and permits it to be changed. When the last Service date is entered, the next Service date is automatically set (next date = today + 6 months).

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Service Date

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Last Service Date 2 Next Service Date 3

Input today’s date as the last service date Specify next service date

4/12.2.2.5 Maintenance counter Display and set the number of brewings since last maintenance and until next maintenance.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Maintenan. Counter

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Flow since maintenance 2 Flow until maintenance 3

Flow since maintenance Flow until maintenance

SeeCounters chapter 4/12.2.2.1

Page 188: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-8

4/12.2.2.6 Filter replacement Setting "Filter Yes/No" If this is set to "Yes", the number of litres filtered since the last filter change is displayed and can be changed. The number of litres which can be filtered before the next filter change is also displayed.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Filter Replacement

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Filter available 2 Flow since filter exchange 3 Flow until filter exchange

Filter available Yes/No Specify volume of water since filter replacement Specify volume of water until filter replacement

Page 189: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-9

4/12.2.2.7 Grounds catcher

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Grounds catcher

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Oper. At Mode, Gr.Cat. Flashing Time Grounds Catcher Info. 2 Content to Info Maximum brewings 3 Level Indicator Display Time

Operating mode, Grounds catcher None/with sensor/without sensor

Content to info 500-5000 g of ground coffee for mode with or without sensor

Level indicator Can be cleared here for mode with or without sensor

Flashing Time 1-30 seconds for mode with sensor only

Maximum brewings 1-100 brewing cycles for mode with sensor only

Display Time (from version 03.01.01) The time lapse before the display can be cleared after replacing the grounds catcher can be set here.

Grounds catcher information Displays the status of the Grounds catcher. Can be cleared

GC Sensor: Number of messages full, Sensoraereabereich GC Counter:Number of messages full, Counter GC Cleaning:Number of messages full, at cleaning cycle start Sensor Conf.: Confirmation of messages from Sensor Counter Conf.:Confirmation of messages from Counter Cleaning Conf.: Confirmation of cleaning messages

Page 190: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-10

4/12.2.2.8 Storage urn Setting the number of urns installed. Setting the storage time for coffee. When setting the storage time:

Option for setting "Auto-empty". Enabling the high-speed function.

Display of the storage time / Automatic emptying of the storage urn After the storage time has elapsed, the message "Storage time exceeded" is displayed. After a further 10 minutes, the storage urn is automatically emptied and, if applicable, a brewing cycle for fresh coffee is started. The time after which "Storage time exceeded" is displayed can be set as desired. The message can be displayed with or without automatic emptying of the storage urn. The storage time is reset to zero each time a brewing cycle is executed.

4/12.2.2.9 Boiler Setting the desire boiler temperature. Setting the heater power. This determines the maximum time for the first heating cycle.

4/12.2.2.10 Accessory Unit

Choco Dispenser Yes/No Rear Tap Yes/No

Page 191: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-11

4/12.2.2.11 Accounting (MDAT)

In the accounting menu, you can set whether an accounting system or vending machine or, alternatively, a coin checker is connected to the combiNation via the serial extension (SE).

If you wish to deactivate an SE, first disconnect it from the 5 V supply voltage and from the CAN bus and then set accounting to "None" in this programme step.

The SE is automatically recognised after a reset.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Accounting

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 None MC/SE 2 Coin checker 3 2nd coin checker

Page 192: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-12

4/12.2.2.12 Self-service mode The error information display can be deactivated in self-service mode. If this function is selected (error information set to “No”), only the exclamation mark appears if an error or message is present. The “N.B.” button has to be pressed x times to make the errors/messages visible. The number of times the button has to be pressed can also be selected (default = 2). The setting selected for this button also applies to the Menu and Information buttons.

Auswahlmenü: Main menu: Submenu: SERVICE

Maschinendaten Self-Service Mode

Zeile Submenu screen 1 Submenu screen 2 Submenu screen 3 1 Error information 2 Confirmation 3

Error information Yes/No

ConfirmationOnly with error information No

4/12.2.2.13 Double click

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Double click

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Double click 2 Deceleration 3

Double click Yes/No

Deceleration 0-2000 msec only if Double click is set to "Yes"

Page 193: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-13

4/12.2.2.14 Standards Here, you can copy factory, customer and Service data back and forth. The factory data are stored in the programme flash memory and are a component part of the programme. The Service data are stored in a separate data flash memory. The customer data are stored in the RAM.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Machine data Standards

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Service Customer

2 Customer Service

3 Factory Service / Customer

Under Standards, Factory Service/Customer a menu is displayed that allows different standard machines (versions) to be selected:

CoffeeTeaFish[soup]

If Coffee or Tea is selected, the number of storage urns must also be specified. This step is principally required for initial commissioning on the test bench.

If the whole machine is rest to the factory data, either “Coffee”, “Tea” or “Fish” should be entered, according to the machine version, followed by the number of storage urns.

Timer settings after copying factory data In the past, copying the factory data did not reset the timer settings, with the result that setting errors sometimes occurred. To rectify this, the timer is also cleared when the factory data are copied across.

Language after copying factory data The language currently set is now retained after copying the factory data.

Page 194: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-14

Page 195: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-15

4/12.2.3 Service – Component test Entry to the Service main menu Component test is via the selection in the Service main menu.

The following test steps are available:

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Component test

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 Brewer motor Flush in Valve Brewing Valve Hot water

2 Portioner Flush out Valve Hotwater Valve

3 Storage urn Cleaning Motor Boiler Heating Line Main menu page 4 Main menu page 5 Main menu page 6

1 Spout Heating Fan Switch-on Relay

2 Door Switch Controls Backup Battery

3 Manual Input Key switch Display Illumin Line Main menu page 7 Main menu page 8 Main menu page 9

1 Cleaning

2 Grounds Catcher

3 Chocolate Dispenser

Page 196: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-16

4/12.2.3.1 Brief description of tests

Test step DescriptionBrewer motor The brewer motor is activated for movement to the positions

UP, DOWN and HOME. The functions of the limit switches and the pulse generator are displayed, together with the current and the motor position.

Portioner * * mit Untermenü, siehe unten Storage urn * * mit Untermenü, siehe nächste Seite Flush in Valve Flush out Valve Cleaning Motor Brewing Valve Hotwater

The valve is activated (the motor moves forwards before this is done).

Hotwater Valve Boiler Heating Spout Heating Door Switch Manual Input FanControls * * mit Untermenü, siehe nächste Seite Key switch The switch position is displayed. Switch-on Relay The power-on relay is activated.

This test should not be executed with the On relay switched off, since the 24 V supply voltage will remain off in this case.

Backup Battery Displays the voltage and status of the battery. Display Illumin Cleaning * * mit Untermenü, siehe nächste Seite Grounds Catcher Chocolate Dispenser See chapter 4/12.2.3.3

Submenu Portioner Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Component test Portioner

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Portioner 1 2 Portioner 2* 3

*only at Combination F2

The light barrier status and the pulse generator pulses are displayed.

Page 197: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-17

Submenu Storage urnSelected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Component test Storage urn

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Rinsing valve Drain valve 2 Coffee output valve Inlet valve 3 Jet valve Level controller pobe

Levelcontrollerprobe urn 1

The digital value from the level controller is displayed together with the amount of coffee determined by conversion with the stored level table. Pressing "+" fills the urn via the rinsing valve (the indicated level must rise).Pressing "-" empties the urn via the drain valve (the indicated level must drop).

Submenu controlsSelected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Component test Controls

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Product LEDs 2 Product Buttons 3 Touch Test

Product LEDs The product and text-field LEDs are activated sequentially Product Buttons The product and text-field LEDs are activated selectively and the

button number is displayed. Touch Test Test of the 4x8 touch-sensitive fields

Submenu Cleaning Selected function Main menu Sub menu SERVICE

Component test Cleaning

Line Sub menu page 1 1 Granulate hopper motor 2 Solenoid barrier 3

Page 198: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-18

4/12.2.3.2 Examples of tests

Example of a valve test:

Example of a motor test:

Results

Results

Back

Back

Start Test

Page 199: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-19

4/12.2.3.3 Component test: chocolate dispenser

Function according to main machine. The test steps are selected after entering the Component Test program. In the Hopper option, the hopper is activated under ‘CPH5’.

The following test steps are available:

Selection menu: Main menu: Submenu: Service

Component test Chocolate dispenser

Line Submenu page 1 Submenu page 2 Submenu page 3 1 HW valve choc Light barrier choc 2 Choc Portioner Door switch choc 3 Mixer motor choc

HW valve choc Valve is actuated

Choc portioner Portioner is actuated. The valves are also actuated, to prevent clogging of the mixing cup.

Mixer motor choc Mixer motor is actuated

Light barrier choc Light barrier switching status display

Door switch choc Door switch switching status display

Page 200: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-20

Page 201: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-21

4/12.2.4 Service - Service routines

After entry to the component test, the test routines can be selected on the following pages:

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Service routines

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 First Run Up Chocolate adjustment 2 Urn 1 leveling Descaling programme 3 Brewer rinsing

4/12.2.4.1 First run up Internal flags in the machine are reset. Forced cleaning is reset.

4/12.2.4.2 Urn 1 calibration Urn calibration is necessary in order to ensure that the analogue values measured by the level controller with the aid of the probe are converted correctly into corresponding quantities of coffee in the urn.

4/12.2.4.3 Brewer rinsing When brewer rinsing is selected, the brewer unit is rinsed via the rinsing inlet/outlet valve.

4/12.2.4.4 Chocolate hopper adjustment* (CPH5)

Adjustment is carried out under menu control by dispensing hot water three times and product three times, alternating between HW and product dispensing. The individual quantities have to be weighed each time and the results input in the display. The appropriate descriptions and prompts appear in the display as this is done. The final value is displayed on completion of adjustment.

See“VB calibration“ Service routines Service 5/4

Page 202: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-22

4/12.2.4.5 Descaling programme

The descaling (deliming) sequence is started in the Service routines.

Start or Interrruption

Boiler is heated to set temperature.

Descaling programme is running. Press EXIT to cancel if desired.

The programme can be repeated several times. After the 5th repeat the descaling programme will be cancelled.

After descaling, the hot rinsing programme is carried out before the first brewing cycle, as a precaution.

When opening up any screwed connection in the boiler and pipework system, the safety procedures must be observed and appropriate steps taken to check that it has in fact been completely depressurised, as indicated on the pressure gauges.

The instructions in chapter 1/3 “Safety instructions” and chapter 5/8.1 “Industrial safety” must always be fully observed.

Descaling see 5/8.5 Maintenance/ descaling part 5 “Service”

Safety instructions 1/3

Industrial safety 5/8.1

Page 203: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-23

Descaling is divided into three operations: Depressurising Descaling Rinsing

Each of these operations can be called up independently via the “Descaling” service routine.

To depressurise, as much cold water as possible is fed through the flow heater as quickly as possible, via the jet valve and brewing valve (without the aid of the espresso pump). Heat transmission from the heated steam boiler quickly reduces the steam pressure in the boiler.

When the steam boiler pressure on the pressure gauge falls to 0 bar, this shows that the boiler has cooled to < 100 °C. The water supply to the machine can be shut off while depressurising is taking place, in order to reduce the pressure in the flow heater as well. Once the brewing pressure gauge drops to 0 bar, depressurisation is complete.

The safety precautions must be observed when opening any screwed connections in the boiler and pipework system. Use appropriate means (such as opening the machine steam cock) to check that depressurisation is complete as indicated by the pressure gauges.

See chapter 5/8.5 Maintenance Descaling program Part 5 Service

Page 204: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-24

4/12.2.5 Service - service information The service information menu is called from the Service main menu.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Service-Info

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 Software version Last Service visit 2 Front door Error list 3 Power stage

Displayed text MeaningFB (1) 01.01.001 Front door, node 1, version 01.01.001 LST(2) 01.03.001 Power stage, node 2, version 01.03.001 L.Service 01.05.2002 Last service on 1st May 2002 Error located errors in error memory

4/12.2.5.1 Software version

4/12.2.5.2 Front door

4/12.2.5.3 Power stage

4/12.2.5.4 Last Service visit

4/12.2.5.5 Error list

Page 205: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-25

4/12.2.6 Accounting

In the customer-service menu, select Accounting.The functions of the SE can now be set.

Depending on the version of the SE, the function settings may differ for the various possible connection modes. Different menus are displayed.

Menus exist for:

Sub-menu See chapter Serial Serial to ISB/external MC3 4/12.2.6.1 Parallel Parallel to external accounting 4/12.2.6.2

MDB coin changer MDBMDB card reader

4/12.2.6.3

8-price 8-price card reader 4/12.2.6.4 Multicounter (MC) 4/12.2.6.5

Page 206: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-26

4/12.2.6.1 Serial

Select function Main menu Sub menu Service

Accounting

Line Main menu page 1 Main menu page 2 Main menu page 3 1 Service information Priceline Waiter transfer 2 Debit Enter Table No? Port Settings 3 Credit Waiter Test Mode

Line Main menu page 4 Main menu page 5 Main menu page 6 1 Memory 2 First Run Up 3 Standards

4/12.2.6.1.1 Service information (SE) The service information contains the version number of the SE software.

4/12.2.6.1.2 Debit

The debit mode can be set here with the + /-fields. Each change must be confirmed with OK. By default, debit mode is set to “Yes”. This display is also used for other Yes/No settings.

Page 207: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-27

4/12.2.6.1.3 Credit Touching the Credit field causes the following Submenus for the various credit modes to be displayed.

By default, free credit is set to “Yes”.

Credit-pool mode This mode is needed if credit is controlled by the cash register and several machines can dispense the same products. If credit-pool mode is set to “Yes”, the machine operates with credit interrogation. Each time a product key is pressed, the machine asks the external MC3 or the ISB whether a credit exists. If a credit exists for the requested product line, the combiNation dispenses the product. Credit-pool mode can process only free credit correctly when used with the ISB. When used with an external MC3, it can process both credit types correctly.

Waiter-credit mode In this credit mode, the credit is stored for both the product and the waiter. Only the waiter who created the credit on the cash register with his waiter key can dispense products from the machine on credit with his waiter key.

Credit pen mode If Credit pen mode is set to “Yes”, dispensing on credit is possible, for all credits, only if the Credit pen is inserted in the machine. The default Credit pen for the SE is key 61.

Credit pen number The display shown below can be used to set the number of the credit key. The entered key number must be confirmed with “OK”.

Credit pen debit mode This field permits selection of the debit mode for the credit key.

Page 208: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-28

4/12.2.6.1.4 Price line Touching the price line field causes the following sub-menus to be displayed. Setting the price lines assigns them to the products. If “hot water small” is assigned to price line 1 as shown in display 3/7 below, then this product will be transferred with the same product number as “Cup Urn 1” in display 1/7.

The number of price units is needed for subtraction of the credits. If, for example, 2 x price 2 is assigned to “Pot VB1” (display 2/7) there must be two credit units in the credit memory for output of “Pot coffee”.

Displays showing products that can be set up and the current settings (price number/price line).

Submenu: Setting price line and price amount

4/12.2.6.1.5 Table number input Touching this field opens the sub-menu for the table functions on the display.

Table number input function By default, the table number input function is set to “No”. If this is changed to “Yes”, the display for input of a table number appears when a waiter key is inserted.

Mandatory table number input By default, mandatory table number input is set to “No”. If this is changed to “Yes”, a product can be dispensed only after a table number has been entered and if this table is free for this waiter.

Table protection By default, the table protection is set to “No”. If this is changed to “Yes”, a table opened with one waiter key cannot be opened by any other waiter.

Page 209: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-29

4/12.2.6.1.6 Waiter function

Waiter lock By default, the waiter lock is set to “Yes”. If the machine is to be operated without a waiter lock, for example when products can be dispensed only in free credit mode, without debit, the waiter lock setting can be changed to “No”.

DialogueBy default, this is set to two digits. If waiter keys with numbers higher than 99 are to be used in the protocol, the number of digits for the transfer of the waiter number must be increased to three.

Waiter transfer This function will be provided later.

4/12.2.6.1.7 Interface Here, you can set the baud rate, the time before offline mode is detected and the time before online mode is detected.

4/12.2.6.1.8 Test mode This function will be provided later.

Page 210: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-30

4/12.2.6.1.9 Memory Touching the “Memory” field opens the following display.

With this function, the credit memory, the debit (offline) memory and the table memory can be cleared independently of each other.

If, for example, you touch the “Debit” field, the following request for confirmation is displayed:

If you confirm your action by pressing “OK”, the selected memory is cleared.

4/12.2.6.1.10 1st run-up Touching the field “Memory” opens the following display.

If you confirm the action with “OK”, the internal markers in the SE are reset. The following display appears:

4/12.2.6.1.11 Standards

The Standards section should be used in the usual way to allocate and store the data.

Page 211: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-31

4/12.2.6.2 Parallel

The adjustable activation times for the reed relays (under Interface) and price category allocation can be set in the Accounting service menu.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Accounting Parallel

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Connection Parallel Standard 2 Priceline 3 First Run Up

4/12.2.6.2.1 Adjustable activation times

The reed relays (1 to 8) are activated accordingly for the pulse durations and interpulse periods.

Adjustment options: 1st pulse duration adjustable from 100 ms to 3000 ms (default 300 ms) Interpulse period adjustable from 100 ms to 2000 ms (default 200 ms) 2nd pulse duration adjustable from 100 ms to 3000 ms (default 300 ms)

All times in digits. 1 digit corresponds to 0.1 s.

Page 212: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-32

4/12.2.6.2.2 Allocation of price categories

A price category from 1 to 8 can be allocated to each product. A “double pulse” (price quantity) can also be allocated to one price category. The dispensing system must be able to process a double pulse. This routine also allows any product to be set to “free”.

4/12.2.6.2.3 Parallel Standards

The Standards section should be used in the usual way to allocate and store the data.

Page 213: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-33

4/12.2.6.3 MDB

4/12.2.6.3.1 Setting with the foil keypad

At the moment, the parameters for the MDB are set with the aid of the foil keypad.

The input menu is activated by pressing the key PRINT/ABR.The keys >> and << are used for selecting the menu pages. Inputs must be confirmed by pressing ENTER.

Pressing EXIT returns you from the menu to normal operation.

When setting up, you must first enter the number of products to be dispensed and the price for each product.

If no slave is selected, the option for entering the number of products and the prices for the slave is disabled.

All parameters can be reset to the “preset default values” by entering “00” as the number of products and pressing ENTER. They can also be reset directly by pressing CLEAR.

Number of products Enter the number of products to be dispensed (00...99). The default setting is 09. After activation of the input menu, the following is displayed:

/ Produkt Editor/ / Prod.Anz. xx >/

If a slave unit is selected, pressing the cursor key opens the following display:

/ Produkte Slave/ / Prod. Anz.xx>>

The number of products for the master must be defined first. The number of products for the slave can then not be more than 99 minus the number of products for the master.

Page 214: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-34

Product prices Enter the product prices (0000.00....9999.99). The default price is 9999.99

/ Produktnumber xx/ / Price xxxx.xx € /

Press ENTER to confirm each input and step to the next product number. A product number can also be selected directly by pressing the corresponding product key on the coffee machine, providing this product key is enabled.

If the default price (9999,99) for a product key is not changed, the following is displayed

/ Please change / / select !!! /

when you press this key, even if no card is inserted.

The slave product prices follow the master product prices in accordance with the selected number of products.

For coin changer only

Filling with coins On the coin changer, select “Fill tubes”. Then fill the tubes for the first time with the appropriate coins. Exit from filling mode on the coin changer. The display “No change” disappears only after a first run up has been executed in the programme “Accounting” in the menu of the combiNation.

Setting the maximum credit If the maximum credit is exceeded when coins are inserted, the coin changer refuses to accept further coins. However, the last coin inserted before the maximum credit is exceeded is still accepted (in other words, overpayment is possible).

/ Max. Kredit / / MP( 0 ) xx.xx € >> / (The value 00.00 € is not effective.)

Page 215: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-35

Maximum amount returned Here, you can enter the coin value of the maximum amount returned. The coin changer will not return more than this amount. This setting is effective only if bit 0 or bit 1 in the sales options are set to “1” or if both of these bits are set to “1”.(Bit 0 = multiple sale; Bit 1 = mandatory purchase)

/ Max. Rueckgabe / MP ( 1 ) xx.xx € >> /

Tube combinations

This setting differs according to the coin changer used. See the user's manual for the coin changer.

Token value ( 0...2) Here, you can assign € values to tokens. Token 0 = large token Token 1 = small token Token 2 = free

/ Tokenvalue (xx) / / xx.xx € >> /

Page 216: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-36

Settings for coin acceptance BDV6 (0...3)

For Cashflow 690, see the user's manual for the coin changer. For Cashflow 560, set via Rout alpha to the coin changer.

Vending options:

/ Vending Options / / x x x x x x x x >> Bit Bit 0

Bit 0: 0 = single sale, 1 = multiple sale Bit 1: 1 = mandatory purchase (for coin changer only) Bit 2: not used Bit 3: Empty tubes of coin checker Bit 4: 1 = display coin-checker communication errors Bit 5: 1 = display card-system communication errors Bit 6: 1 = currency display blank (caution if bit 7 = 1: EURO)Bit 7: 1 = currency display EURO (if bit 7 = 0 and bit 6 = 0), default = 0

Notes on the vending options Bit 4 must be set to 1 if a coin changer is used. Bit 5 must be set to 1 if a chip-card reader is used. For parallel operation (coin changer and chip-card reader), both bit 4 and bit 5 must be set to 1. If bit 4 and bit 5 are not set, the SAE cannot detect an open-circuit in the connection to the chip-card reader or the coin changer. The error message “Communication error xxx” is not displayed.

Conversion to EUR (€) must also be carried out on the chip-card reader and/or the coin changer. After a mains power failure, or after a first run up of the machine in the SE settings, the stored credit is cleared! Press ENTER to accept the settings. In order to switch to vending mode, the first run up must be executed in the SE settings.

Page 217: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-37

Select slave Ensure that the connection cable to the slave is fitted before attempting to select a slave. The following is displayed:

/ Slave Option XX / / Slave aktiv / 0= no slave 1, 1= slave 1 0= no slave 2, 1= slave 2

The second line of the display shows whether the connection to the slave exists.

“Slave active” if the connection operates correctly.

“No slave” if no data transfer is possible.

Select languageSelecting the language for the machine also changes the display of the attached device to the same language.

4/12.2.6.3.2 Settings on the machine display (Accounting in the main menu) In the customer-service menu, select Accounting.

The functions of the SE can now be set.

First run up Touching this field opens the following display:

If you confirm with “OK” that you want to execute the first run up, the internal markers of the SE are reset. The following is displayed:

Page 218: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-38

4/12.2.6.4 Card reader, 8-price From the customer-service menu, select Accounting to set the times for the interface and the price assignments.

Selected function Main menu Sub menu Service

Accounting 8-price

Line Sub menu page 1 Sub menu page 2 Sub menu page 3 1 Connection Standards 2 Priceline 3 First run up

All times are specified in digits, where 1 digit corresponds to 0.1 seconds.

4/12.2.6.4.1 Connection

Card reader response time (WA-Answer) The default timeout for a response from the card reader is 1 second. It can be set to any value from 0.2 to 20 seconds.

Page 219: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-39

Card reader credit clear (K0) time (KL-Credit CLR) The default timeout is 2 seconds. K0 is opened for this period when the product is dispensed, starting at the beginning of the dispensing operation. The timeout can be set to any value from 0.2 to 20 seconds.

4/12.2.6.4.2 Assignment of the price lines The customer-service engineer can assign each product individually in the customer-service menu. It is also possible to set any product to “free”.

4/12.2.6.4.3 First run up

4/12.2.6.4.4 Card reader standards

The Standards section should be used in the usual way to allocate and store the data.

Page 220: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-40

4/12.2.6.5 Operation without accounting (software)

When operating without a dispensing system, for instance during commissioning or if the dispensing system is defective, “All free” can be set to “Yes” via the manual portioning option in the Selection menu. When this setting is operative, the SE will not be queried.

Products dispensed are not recorded. It is strongly recommended that an accounting PIN be allocated to prevent this setting being activated.

Machine data, without accounting

Alternatively, “No” can be selected under Accounting in the Machine data.

Accounting will automatically be detected again the next time the network is scanned.

Page 221: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/12 Service

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-41

4/12.2.6.6 Operation without accounting (hardware )

The SE can be deactivated by means of bridge BR1 (position 1-2) on the parallel accounting board in order to check the machine or when operating without a dispensing system. When this setting is operative, the SE sends an enabling signal to the WMF machine in response to every product inquiry. The green “enable” LED on the PS-CAN assembly always lights up. Product dispensing is recorded via the product counters on the front panel.

4/12.2.6.7 Miscellaneous If coffee / hot water dispensing is set to FREE-FLOW, START-STOP mode, dispensing can be started once upon enabling the dispensing system. Multibrewing: the product is indicated, irrespective of the number of brewing cycles. Fixed preselect: the number of brewing cycles is indicated.

4/12.2.6.8 MC (CAN) To be provided later

Page 222: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/12-42

Page 223: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/13 Brewing sequences

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/13-1

4/13 Brewing sequences

4/13.1 Preheating Automatic heating programmes are provided to ensure that the coffee is kept at a uniformly good temperature. A distinction is made between the first hot rinse after warming up and the hot rinse before each brewing cycle.

Hot rinsing can be switched off via the machine configurations on the Brewer page. However, the first hot rinse is always carried out after cleaning or after a first run up, to remove any cleaner residues from the coffee system.

4/13.2 Preselected quantities See storage and coffee output, Chapter 2/4.

4/13.3 High-speed brewing If high-speed brewing is enabled in the machine data, brewing into the storage urn can be initiated directly with the appropriate button on the touch-screen display. The maximum batch which the storage urn can accept is brewed. The preselected quantity must be greater than zero and the storage urn must be capable of accepting at least one litre of coffee.

4/13.4 Aborting brewing Brewing is aborted:

if the machine is turned off with the key switch, if the Grounds catcher is removed for more than 40 seconds, if the power is disconnected for more than 5 seconds.

(Various special programmes, such as the German Railway version, may react differently.)

SeeStorage urn and coffee output Chapter 2/4 Part 2 – “Engineering"

Page 224: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/13-2

4/13.5 Timing diagrams of brewing cycles

4/13.5.1 Hot rinse before each brewing cycle

4/13.5.2 Brewing cycle, 2 litres

(0) Brewer drive, motor (2) Mixing valve (4) Rinsing valve storage urn (6) Jet valve urn1 (8) Brewing valve (10) Coffee dispensing valve (12) Rinsing valve storage urn (14) Washing in valve brewer

(0) Brewer drive, motor (2) Mixing valve (4) Rinsing valve storage urn(6) Brewing valve (8) Coffee dispensing valve (10) Rinsing valve storage urn (12) Washing in valve

Page 225: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/13 Brewing sequences

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/13-3

4/13.5.3 Brewing cycle, ECO

4/13.5.4 Brewing cycle, 1 litre, manu(al

(0) Brewer drive, motor (2) Mixing valve (4) Rinsing valve storage urn (6) Brewing valve (8) Coffee dispensing valve (10) Rinsing valve storage urn (12) Washing in valve brewer

(0) Brewer drive, motor (2) Mixing valve (4) Rinsing valve storage urn (6) Brewing valve (8) Coffee dispensing valve (10) Rinsing valve storage urn (12) Washing in valve

Page 226: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/13-4

4/13.5.5 Hot rinse

4/13.5.6 Automatic cleaning

(0) Brewer drive, motor on (2) Mixing valve (4) Rinsing valve storage urn (6) Jet valve storage urn(8) Brewing valve (10) Ri i l

(0) Brewer drive, motor (2) Mixing valve (4) Rinsing valve storage urn (6) Jet valve storage urn(8) Brewing valve (10) Venting valve (12) Cleaning, motor (14) Coffee dispensing valve (16) Rinsing valve

Page 227: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/13 Brewing sequences

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/13-5

4/13.6 Chocolate products Chocolate products are prepared in flow mode. Hot water is mixed with the chocolate powder in the hopper. The mixture is then beaten in the adYescent mixer to make a creamy product.

4/13.6.1 Timing diagrams of chocolate products

Diagram 1: Product output with product time < (time water – 1s)

Diagram 2: Product output on (time water – 1s) < product time

Elapse time

Water

Mixer

Product

Elapse time

Water

Mixer

Product

Page 228: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/13-6

Page 229: Training Manual CombiNationF

4/14 Hot water dispensing

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/14-1

4/14 Hot water dispensing In hot water dispensing the the hot water dispensing valve is controlled.

Page 230: Training Manual CombiNationF

Software

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

4/14-2

Page 231: Training Manual CombiNationF

3/1 Cleaning

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/1-1

Part 3 – Cleaning

3/1 General information on cleaning

3/2 Cleaning the machine

3/4 Cleaning the chocolate dispenser

Pressing the Cleaning soft button in the selection menu opens the main Cleaning menu.

3/1 General information on cleaning

3/1.1 Daily cleaning Daily cleaning of the coffee machine is very important in order to ensure correct operation of the machine and optimum coffee quality. Accordingly, 26 hours after switching on the machine, a message will appear in the display reminding the operator to carry out the daily cleaning program.

To ensure the cleaning program is carried out, after a further 24 hours the machine will automatically halt product dispensing if the cleaning program has not yet been run. After this, the cleaning programme must be executed before the machine again supplies coffee.

3

The times can be set in the machine-data programme "Cleaning".

“Machine Datas“ Software - Part 4

Page 232: Training Manual CombiNationF

Cleaning

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/1-2

If the machine is switched off without cleaning after brewing and if more than 26 hours have elapsed since it was last cleaned when it is switched on again, then the machine will remained blocked after warming up. The cleaning program must be run before the machine can be operated again.

There is a danger of burns or scalds in the area of the coffee spout. If the coffee spout is removed, do not press any product buttons or execute the cleaning programme.

Follow the precautions on the pack when using the cleaning product. The cleaner is corrosive. Cleaning fluid flows out of the combination spout while cleaning is taking place.

The cleaning programme may be executed only with the cleaning adapters in the correct positions. A message on the display reminds the user of this.

Page 233: Training Manual CombiNationF

3/1 Cleaning the machine

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/2-1

3/2 Cleaning the machine

3/2.1 Fully-automatic cleaning (with the cleaning granulate hopper) To fill the cleaning granulate hopper, remove its cover and fill it with cleaning granulate (Order No. 33.2118.6000). Then close the hopper with its cover.

The machine is ready, with the display on shown the right or the display for the selected storage stage visible:

Press to switch to the second level, the selection menu, where cleaning of the machine can be started.

If access rights (PIN numbers) have been assigned, the machine prompts you for your PIN when you press . Enter your PIN. If this is correct, the selection menu is then displayed.

To start cleaning of the machine, press in the selection menu.

The following display then appears:

To clean the machine, press Machine.

Ensure that the cleaning granulate hopper always contains sufficient cleaning granulate.Use only the WMF special cleaning granulate. Do not overfill the hopper, since this can cause the granulate portioner to jam.

Page 234: Training Manual CombiNationF

Cleaning

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/2-2

By pressing Switching off or No Switching off, select whether the machine is to return to the ready state after cleaning (No Switching off) or is to switch itself off automatically (Switching off).

You are then asked to confirm that cleaning is to be executed. Press to confirm this or press to exit from the selection menu without executing the cleaning operation.When cleaning starts, any coffee remaining in the storage urn is drained automatically.

The following is displayed:

If the machine is connected to a grounds ejector Type 9011, you are requested to remove the Grounds catcher from the ejector,…

... to empty it, ...

… to clean it, …

… and to insert it again.

Page 235: Training Manual CombiNationF

3/1 Cleaning the machine

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/2-3

Before cleaning starts, you are requested, by a message on the display, to place the cleaning adapters under the spouts.

Always place the prescribed protective screen (cleaning adapter) in front of the spouts before starting cleaning. Never reach under the spouts during the cleaning operation!

Press to confirm that you have positioned the cleaning adapters. The following is then displayed: The cleaning programme takes about 25 minutes. The remaining time is shown on the display during the cleaning operation.

Page 236: Training Manual CombiNationF

Cleaning

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/2-4

3/2.2 Semi-automatic cleaning (with the manual input)

The machine is ready, with the display on shown the right or the display for the selected storage stage visible:

Press to switch to the second level, the selection menu, where cleaning of the machine can be started.

If access rights (PIN numbers) have been assigned, the machine prompts you for your PIN when you press . Enter your PIN. If this is correct, the selection menu is then displayed.

To start the cleaning operation, press in the selection menu.

The following is displayed:

To clean the machine, press Machine.

By pressing Switching off or No Switching off, select whether the machine is to return to the ready state after cleaning (No Switching off) or is to switch itself off automatically (Switching off).

You are then asked to confirm that cleaning is to be executed. Press to confirm this or press to exit from the selection menu without executing the cleaning operation.When cleaning starts, any coffee remaining in the storage urn is drained automatically.

Page 237: Training Manual CombiNationF

3/1 Cleaning the machine

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/2-5

Before cleaning starts, you are requested, by a message on the display, to place the cleaning adapters under the spouts.

Always place the prescribed protective screen (cleaning adapter) in front of the spouts before starting cleaning. Never reach under the spouts during the cleaning operation!

After selecting the cleaning mode and confirming that you want to clean the machine, you a requested to drop cleaning granulate into the manual input.

Open the cover of the manual input, drop in a level coffee-measuring spoon (Order No. 33 0742 3000) of WMF special cleaning granulate and close the cover again.

Ensure that the cleaning granulate hopper always contains sufficient cleaning granulate.Use only the WMF special cleaning granulate. Do not overfill the hopper, since this can cause the granulate portioner to jam.

Page 238: Training Manual CombiNationF

Cleaning

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/2-6

The cleaning programme takes about 25 minutes. The remaining time is shown on the display during the cleaning operation.

Ensure that the cleaning granulate hopper always contains sufficient cleaning granulate.Use only the WMF special cleaning granulate. Do not overfill the hopper, since this can cause the granulate portioner to jam.

3/2.3 Timer-controlled cleaning

With the function "Timer" in the selection menu of the machine, you can programme the desired cleaning times so that the machine is cleaned automatically at these times. The specified times apply to the selected days of the week; they are not related to dates.

SeeSettings, Timer

Page 239: Training Manual CombiNationF

3/1 Cleaning the chocolate dispenser

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/3-1

3/3 Cleaning the chocolate dispenser

3/3.1 Daily cleaning

It is essential to carry out cleaning (rinsing with hot water) before starting up and after shutting down each day. Cleaning is activated via the touch display on the main machine. The Auxiliary Machine option should be selected in the Cleaning menu.Rinsing takes 30 seconds. The time is shown in the display.

3/3.2 Intermediate cleaning

To remind the user when cleaning is due, this can be activated in the Settings menu and a time can be selected after which the cleaning prompt will appear in the display.

Caution! Scalding hazard: Never operate the machine without the dispensing spout, mixing cup and hopper in place. Hot water flows out of the dispensing spout while cleaning is taking place.

In the case of power failure, the cleaning program resumes once power is restored.

Page 240: Training Manual CombiNationF

Cleaning

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

3/3-2

3/3.3 Weekly cleaning

Caution! Injury hazard.

The main machine is switched off for cleaning. The chocolate dispenser is thus also switched off.Open the front door, remove the product hopper, lift off the lid and empty the hopper. Unscrew the nut on the outlet cap and coupling. Pull out the auger and remove the outlet cap. Clean all the dismantled parts to remove product residues and dry thoroughly. Use the brush supplied to remove product residues from the inside and outside of the hopper. If the hopper is very dirty, it should be wet cleaned and thoroughly dried afterwards. On completion of cleaning, reassemble all the parts in reverse order.

Ensure outlet cap is in the correct position. Replace the product hopper in position.

Injury hazard

Page 241: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/0 Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/0-1

4

1

5

Part 2 - Engineering

2/1 Coffee hoppers

2/2 Boiler and pipework

2/3 Brewing unit

2/4 Coffee storage and output

2/5 Controls

2/6 * Electronics

2/7 * Electrical system

2/8 * Accounting options

2/9 * Cleaning

2/10 * Chocolate dispenser

2/11 * Grounds ejector

* not shown on this page

2

Page 242: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/0-2

Page 243: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/1 Coffee hoppers

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/1-1

2/1 Coffee hoppers On the single coffee machine, there is one lockable ground-coffee portioner. On the double coffee machine, there are two lockable ground-coffee portioners. Each ground-coffee portioner is capable of holding about 2200 g of ground coffee. The capacity of the portioner depends on the type of ground coffee being used. Other coffee types can be inserted through the manual input for sampling.

Page 244: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/1-2

2/1.1 Ground coffee hopper (GCH)

The ground-coffee portioner (GCH) is an auger-type portioner. The size of each portion is controlled by metering the number of revolutions of the portioning auger.

Capacity: 2 200 g ± 200 g Remainder when "empty" is signalled:

90 g ± 50 g

Output rate: 8,5 g/sec ± 1 g Grammes per pulse: 0.17 g

See“Mechanical adjustments“ Service - Part 5

See“Modules“ Basics - Part 1

See“Default values“ Service - Part 5

See“Customer-service programme“ “Component test“ “Machine Datas“ Software - Part 4

Page 245: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/1 Coffee hoppers

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/1-3

2/1.1.1 Ground-coffee portioner - motor

The GCH motor is connected via gearwheels to the portioning auger of the GCH. The size of each portion is controlled by metering the number of revolutions of the portioning auger. The status of the light barrier and the pulses generated by the pulse generator in the motor are displayed during the component test

Handling of errors in the ground-coffee portioning motor For further protection of the GCH module, a special monitoring circuit is installed. This switches off the GCH motor after 20 seconds if it starts to run when not activated by the programme. The error is shown on the display. The number of detected errors is stored in the error memory. Motor Rated voltage 24 V DC Operating current 1.4 A < 2 A Blocking current 8 A Rated speed 250 U/min Pulse generator Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5 % Current consumption 5 mA Load resistance 1 k Pulse length 20 msec Limit time for pulses 0.5 sec

Page 246: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/1-4

2/1.1.2 Light barrier GCH (optional)

An empty message is transmitted to the PCB via the light barrier. This is stored and appears in the display.

Light barrier Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5 % Current consumption < 30 mA Load resistance 1 k

All brewing operations concerned are halted until refilling and acknowledgment have taken place. 2/1.2 Manual input for sampling of ground coffee

The manual input is used for sampling ground coffee or, on machines without granulate portioner, for insertion of cleaning granulate. The position of the cover is monitored by a magnet switch in the cover and a reed switch in the base of the manual input.

Switch for manual input Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5 % Current consumption 5 mA Load resistance 1 k�

See“Product data“ “Configuration and sampling“Chapter "Machine Datas" Software - Part 4

Page 247: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Boiler and Pipework

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-1

2/2 Boiler and pipework

The following main assemblies are described in the Boiler and pipework chapter

2.1 Cold water connection

2.2 Boiler system

2.3 Hot water dispensing

2.4 Brewer water system

Page 248: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-2

2/2.1 Cold water connection

2/2.1.1 Cold water inlet

Water inlet group (fitting) Connection ½ inch Sieve In pressure-reduction

valve Mesh size 0.1mm

Pressure-reduction valve Flow pressure 2.6 bar (at input pressure 5 bar)Water-pressure monitor 1.5 bar � 0.5 bar Non-return valve DN10 DVGW-certified

Water-pressure switch Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5 % Current consumption 5 mA Load resistance 1 k

Page 249: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Boiler and pipework

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-3

2/2.1.1.1 Water distributor with bypass for water filter

The water distributor supplies all components of the water system with water. If necessary, a water filter can be connected to the bypass connection. This avoids loading the water filter with the brewer unit rinsing water or the grounds catcher washing water.

2/2.1.1.2 Connection nipple

Connection nipple, 1/2 inch, for the cold-water line.

Connection 1/2 inch 2/2.1.1.3 Non-return valve

An officially approved non-return valve is mandatory. It prevents water from flowing back out of the coffee machine into the public water-supply system.

Non-return valve DN10 DVGW-certified

See“Pipework and routing“ Drawings - Part 6

Page 250: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-4

2/2.1.1.4 Water pressure control device The water pressure control device checks that the necessary water pressure is

available on site. If the water pressure is insufficient when the machine is switched on, a corresponding message is displayed. Brewing or cleaning cannot take place until the correct water pressure is reached. If the water pressure falls below the permissible value while brewing is taking place, brewing is halted. Brewing resumes when the

correct pressure is re-established. The error is stored in the error memory with the number of water pressure errors that have occurred. Pressure control device 1.6 bar � 0.2/-0.15 bar

2/2.1.1.5 Pressure reducer

The pressure-reduction valve reduces the local water pressure to the value needed in the machine.

Pressure reducer Flow pressure 2 bar (at inlet pressure 5 bar) Sieve in the pressure-reduction valve

Mesh size 0.1 mm

See"Error memory" Machine Datas Software - Part 4

"Customer-service programme" "Component test" "Machine Datas" Software - Part 4

Page 251: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Boiler and pipework

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-5

2/2.2 Boiler system

The boiler provides the hot water needed for brewing coffee and for dispensing hot water. The boiler temperature is monitored by the controller with the aid of a temperature sensor. The boiler heater is switched on and off by a circuit breaker which disconnects all phases of the supply voltage. Overheating of the boiler in the case of a error is prevented by a safety temperature limiter which switches off all phases of the heater. If the pressure in the boiler rises to an impermissible value as the result of a error, the excess pressure is discharged with the aid of the safety valve.

Page 252: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-6

2/2.2.1 Boiler

The boiler provides the hot water needed for brewing coffee and dispensing hot water and for the optional chocolate dispenser, if fitted.

Boiler Total boiler volume 6.5l Safety valve 3.2 bar Burst protection About 8 bar Test pressure 4.2 bar Safety temperature limiter 135�C –10K (at an ambient temperature

of 50�C), all phases disconnected The heating-up phase can be by-passed by entering and then exiting the Service program.

Page 253: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Boiler and pipework

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-7

2/2.2.2 Boiler heaters

The heaters heat the water in the boiler to the selected temperature. The desired temperature can be set in the adjustment programme. When the controller detects that the water temperature is below the desired value, it switches on the heaters until the water temperature rises above the set value. The boiler heaters are not normally switched on during execution of the Service programme. The only exceptions to this are the descaling programme, the test step "boiler heaters" and the Product data. When the machine is switched on, all

brewing operations and dispensing of hot water are disabled until the water in the boiler reaches the specified temperature (warm-up phase). Boiler heaters 3x 4.5 kW tubular heaters, delta connection Rated voltage per heater

230 V for 3 kW; 400 V for 13.5 kW

Current consumption Special versions for 200/220 V are delta-connected. Wiring is adapted to handle the higher current.

Activation of circuit breaker

Increased current through the boiler heaters activates the circuit breaker via a coupling relay.

See“Descaling programme“ Software - Part 4

Page 254: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-8

2/2.2.3 Temperature sensor

An NTC resistor is used as a temperature sensor. Its resistance varies inversely with the water temperature (low water temperature = high resistance and vice versa). Due to the position of the sensor, the indicated temperature is about 4K lower than the actual water temperature. For example, at an indicated value of 92 °C, the hot water leaving the boiler has an actual temperature of 96 °C.

Error handling for the temperature sensor Breakage of the sensor Overtemperature If either of these errors occurs, any brewing operation or dispensing of hot water which is currently running is terminated immediately and further operations of these types are disabled. The programme routine for the temperature sensor remains active. If the temperature returns to within the permissible range, brewing and dispensing of hot water are again enabled. Errors are shown on the display. The number of detected errors is stored in the error memory. Boiler temperature sensor Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5 % Current consumption 5 mA Resistance values 25°C 3000 � (± 150 �) 95°C 236 � (± 25 �)

2/2.2.4 Boiler manometer

The boiler manometer is located behind the left front door.

Test pressure 2,6 bar

See“Service programme“ “Component test“ “Machine Datas“ Software - Part 4

Page 255: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Boiler and pipework

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-9

2/2.2.5 Hot water spout with sieve

Dispensing of hot water is timer-controlled. Four output quantities are available.

2/2.2.6 Safety temperature limiter (STL)

Error handling for safety temperature limiter If the water exceeds the preset temperature of +135 °C -10K (at an ambient temperature of +50 °C), the contacts open and are locked in this position. When the temperature sensor has cooled down, they can be unlocked by pressing the reset knob. The contacts are also opened and locked if the hydraulic sensor system develops a leak or if the complete STL is cooled to a temperature below –5 °C. In the latter case, warm the sensor to 20 °C and then press the reset knob to release the contacts. Safety temperature limiter (STL) Switching temperature +135�C -10K (at an ambient temperature of +50�C)

See“Hot water output“ 2/2.3

“Service programme“ “Product data“ “Machine Datas“ Software - Part 4

Page 256: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-10

2/2.2.7 Boiler safety valve

If the boiler pressure rises to an excessive value as the result of a error, the excess pressure is released via the safety valve. During heating of the boiler, water escapes from the safety valve due to thermal expansion.

Error handling for safety valve The safety valve is intended to prevent the pressure in the boiler from reaching a dangerous value. The escape of water through this valve during heating of the boiler is normal and does not indicate the presence of a error. Safety valve 3.2 bar

2/2.2.8 Burst protection

The burst protection is located on the boiler flange. If the safety devices fail, the O-ring is pushed out of the groove at a pressure of approximately 8 bar.

Burst protection approximately 8 bar

Page 257: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Boiler and pipework

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-11

2/2.3 Hot water output

The hot water output is timer-controlled. Two output quantities are available in each of the front-door positions "down" and "up". � Hot water, small, down � Hot water, large, down (if user executes a "double click", i.e. presses

button twice) � Hot water, small, up � Hot water, large, up (if user executes a "double click", i.e. presses button

twice) Quantity 1: this is dispensed if the hot water button is pressed once. Quantity 2: this is dispensed if the user presses the hot water button twice within 0.8 seconds (this time can be adjusted as desired). One portioning type can be assigned to each of the four different quantities of hot water. The “double click” function has to be enabled in the machine data. This function is not available on machines with Accounting or in self-service mode.

See“Mechanical adjustments“Chapters 5/6 Service - Part 5

“Service programme“ “Product data“ “Machine Datas“ Software - Part 4

“Hot water output“ Chapter 2/5 Controls

Page 258: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-12

2/2.3.1 Hot water output valve

The hot water is dispensed via the hot water output valve. Valve monitoring: All hot water valves are monitored for a maximum activation time. In other words, the valves are forcibly closed when this maximum time has elapsed. This is shown on the display. The number of forced closures is stored in the error memory.

2/2.3.2 Hot water spout

Hot water can be dispensed in the four above-mentioned quantities through the hot water spout.

2/2.3.3 Swirler

The swirler on the end of the hot water spout ensures a smooth flow of water.

See“Mechanical adjustments“ Chapters 5/6 Service - Part 5

“Adjustment” Hot water dispensing” Software - Part 4

Page 259: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Boiler and pipework

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-13

2/2.4 Brewing-water system

Page 260: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-14

2/2.4.1 Valve group

The valve group consists of the following valves: � Brewing valve � Rinsing inlet valve, brewer � Hot water output valve � Jet valve urn1 � Rinsing valve urn1 Optional: rinsing valve urn2

2/2.4.1.1 Brewing valve

The brewing valve directs water from the boiler via the distribution sieve into the brewing chamber. The amount of water is measured by the flow meter (FM): when the preset number of FM pulses have been counted, the brewing valve is closed.

Brewing valve 24 V < 0.5 A (420 mA)

2/2.4.1.2 Brewing valve nozzle

The nozzle ensures an optimal rate of flow of the brewing water.

Brewing valve nozzle Ø 1.5

Page 261: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Boiler and pipework

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-15

2/2.4.1.3 Jet valve urn1

During brewing, additional water is directed into the urn under control of a timer, in accordance with the selected brewing procedure.

2/2.4.1.4 Jet valve nozzle urn1 The nozzle ensures an optimal rate of flow of the additional water.

Jet valve nozzle urn1 Ø 2.0

2/2.4.1.5 Inlet rinsing valve

The timer-controlled inlet rinsing valve directs hot water from the boiler via the inlet chute to the brewing chamber in order to rinse any remaining ground coffee from the chute into the chamber.

Inlet rinsing valve 24 V < 0.5 A (420mA)

See“Product data“ “Machine Datas“ Software - Part 4

See“Product data“ “Machine Datas“ Software - Part 4

Page 262: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-16

2/2.4.1.6 Rinsing valve Urn 1

Storage urn 1 is rinsed via the rinsing valve for Urn 1. The period of operation is time-controlled.

Rinsing valve 24 V < 0,5 A (420mA)

2/2.4.2 Outlet rinsing valve / Rinsing valve for grounds

ejector The outlet rinsing valve for the brewer supplies the annular rinsing ring (in the brewer) with cold water. Optionally, the double-valve shown here can be installed here. The second valve is for rinsing the pre-dryer of the grounds ejector and supplies the annular ring of the ejector with cold water. Both valves are timer-controlled. The activation time for the

grounds-ejector rinsing valve can be adjusted. Brewer rinsing valve 24 V < 0.5 A (420 mA) Grounds-ejector rinsing valve 24 V < 0.5 A (420 mA)

"Service programme" "Product data" "Machine Datas" Software - Part 4

Page 263: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Boiler and pipework

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-17

2/2.4.3 Flow meter (FM)

The amount of brewing water is measured by the FM. When the preset number of FM pulses have been counted, the brewing valve closes.

Error handling for FM monitoring Dead time 20 seconds: if no pulse is received within 20 seconds after opening the brewing valve, the brewing or cleaning operation is terminated. Timeout: if no pulses are received for 10 seconds during brewing (16 seconds during cleaning), brewing is terminated. The error is shown on the display. The number of detected errors is stored in the error memory. Flow meter Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5 % Pulses/litre 750 Current consumption 5 mA ccm/pulse 1.33 Load resistance 1 k Nozzle size � 2.5mm Pulse output Rated pulse length 40 ms

2/2.4.4 Brewing pressure manometer

No brewing pressure manometer is installed on the machine. To measure the brewing pressure, the manometer from the service kit (33 2730 0000) can be mounted on the T-piece after the brewing valve.

“Component test“ Software - Part 4

See“Pipework and routing“ Drawings - Part 6

Page 264: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/2-18

Page 265: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/3 Brewing unit

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/3-1

2/3 Brewing unit

In the brewing unit below the ground-coffee portioner (GCH), the piston opens the filling aperture for ground coffee when it is in its idle position. For each batch of coffee to be brewed, the appropriate amount of ground coffee is measured and rinsed into the brewing chamber. The piston then moves to the brewing position, sealing the brewing chamber. During the subsequent brewing operation, brewing water flows through a distribution sieve onto the ground coffee in the brewing chamber. After the brewing operation, the piston

moves via the pressure-release position to the rinsing position and the exhausted ground coffee is rinsed out of the chamber. The annular rinsing ring ensures effective cleaning of the brewer. The idle position of the brewer is the rinsing position.

See“Brewing positions“ 2/3.1.5

See“Component test“ Software Part 4

Page 266: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/3-2

2/3.1 Brewing unit 2/3.1.1 Brewer drive

The brewer is driven by a DC motor. The drive system consists of the motor, a cam disc and a crank for the slide to which the piston is fastened. The cam disc (Gray-code disc) actuates the microswitches on the switch plate which indicate the brewer positions.

2/3.1.1.1 Brewer drive, motor

Drive motor DC motor Rated voltage 24V,

rated speed 250 1/min Gear ratio i = 4/41

2/3.1.1.2 Brewer drive, cam disc

Page 267: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/3 Brewing unit

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/3-3

2/3.1.1.3 Switch plate

Error handling for brewer limit switches If the brewer position is not detected within a preset time, the brewer motor is switched off. If the machine is switched off and on again, another attempt to reach the desired position is started. The error is shown on the display. The number of detected errors is stored in the error memory. Brewer limit switch Supply voltage 5V

Switches 5V 2/3.1.2 Brewer base 2/3.1.2.1 Brewing sieve, complete

2/3.1.2.2 Piston

The piston is screwed into the slide.

See“Mechanical Adjustments“ Service - Part 5

Page 268: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/3-4

2/3.1.2.3 Sleeve

The sleeve seals the lower end of the piston. If the sleeve becomes badly worn, too much water will leak out of the spout during brewing.

2/3.1.3 Brewer, top section

2/3.1.3.1 Distribution sieve

During brewing, water flows through the distribution sieve onto the ground coffee in the brewing chamber. This ensures that all of the coffee is brewed uniformly and optimally.

See“Mechanical adjustments“ Service – Part 5

Page 269: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/3 Brewing unit

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/3-5

2/3.1.3.2 Rinsing ring

The rinsing ring ensures optimal distribution of the water when the brewing chamber is rinsed. The ring turns, driven by the cleaning motor, during the rinsing operation.

2/3.1.3.3 Cleaning motor

The cleaning motor and the crank turn the rinsing ring in the brewing chamber. The cleaning motor is timer-controlled.

Cleaning motor Rated voltage: 24 V (� 20%) Operating current 0.9 A < 2 A

2/3.1.3.4 Crank, complete

The crank is the connecting element between the cleaning motor and the rinsing ring.

2/3.1.3.5 Inlet funnel

The preset amount of ground coffee is portioned into the inlet funnel and rinsed into the brewing chamber.

Page 270: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/3-6

2/3.1.3.6 Inlet rinsing nozzle

The inlet rinsing nozzle supplies water which rinses the ground coffee into the brewing chamber after it has been portioned.

2/3.1.3.7 Fan

The fan is activated as necessary to extract moisture from the area around the ground-coffee portioner (GCH).The fan is activated.

Fan Rated voltage 24 V DC Current consumption < 0.3 A

See“Mechanical adjustments“ Service – Part 5

Page 271: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/3 Brewing unit

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/3-7

2/3.1.4 Brewing chamber positions Pressure-release position, rinsing position, idle position, brewing position

pressure-release position rinsing position

brewing position idle position

Page 272: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/3-8

See“Switch plate” 2/3 “Brewing unit”

Coding of the limit switches S 1 S 2 S 3 Designation 0 I 0 0 Idle position 1 I 0 0 Piston moving to brewing position 2 0 I 0 Brewing position 3 0 0 I Piston moving to pressure-release position 4 I I I Pressure-release position 5 0 I 0 Piston moving to rinsing position 6 0 0 I Rinsing position 7 I I I Piston moving to idle position

Page 273: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/4 Storage urn and coffee output

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/4-1

2/4 Storage urn and coffee output

Each storage urn can store up to four litres of coffee. The stored coffee can then be dispensed with the output buttons in various dispensing modes (portioned, free flow, start-stop or free flow, portioned). It leaves the machine via the output valves. Stored coffee can also be dispensed in manual mode. (1) Single coffee machine (2) Double coffee machine The single coffee machine has one storage urn on the top. On the double coffee machine, there is a second GCH in the position occupied by the urn1 on a single coffee machine and the two storage urns are located in the expansion disc connected to the machine.

See“Portioning modes“ Hot water output 2/5.4

Page 274: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/4-2

2/4.1 Storage urn, complete

The storage urn is heated and has a capacity of four litres. It is filled with batches (1 or 2 litres) of brewed coffee. The amount of brewing water is monitored by the flow meter. The amount of coffee in the storage urn is monitored by the level controller, using the probe in the urn, and is shown on the display. Depending on the preselection, a new brewing operation is initiated when the coffee drops to the appropriate level.

The optional second storage urn (urn2) is identical. 2/4.2 Urn heater

The heater for the storage urn keeps the contents of the urn at a constant temperature for a long period.

PTC heater Rated voltage 230 V Current consumption < 0.3 A Peak power-on current 1.6 A

See“Setting programme“ Software - Part 4

Page 275: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/4 Storage urn and coffee output

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/4-3

2/4.3 Level controller for storage urn

The level controller and the level probe measure the level of the coffee in the urn. The level probe operates on the principle of a capacitor. The coffee in the urn and the probe form a capacitor whose capacitance changes proportionally with the coffee level. The level controller converts this change into a voltage, which is then evaluated via an analogue-digital converter in the controller.

Error handling The controller monitors the plausibility of the signal (minimum value 37 digits, maximum value 235 digits). Errors are shown on the display. The number of detected errors is stored in the error memory. 2/4.4 Probe

Error handling If the storage urn is emptied by the programme and the probe detects, after a dynamic limit time, that there is still coffee in the storage urn, a error message is issued. The error is shown on the display. The number of detected errors is stored in the error memory. If the machine is switched off and on again, a further attempt to empty the urn is started.

Page 276: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/4-4

2/4.5 Urn cover

The urn cover has inlets for coffee, jet water and rinsing water and an overflow connection. The retaining plate secures the connections and the probe.

2/4.6 Coffee and rinsing water inlets and outlets on the

Urn cover

2/4.7 Coffee hose heater

The coffee hose is heated to prevent the coffee cooling down en route from the storage urn to the dispensing valve when portioning is halted.

Flexible coffee hose heater – resistance heater Rated voltage 24 V Current consumption Rated power 13 (+4) W

Page 277: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/4 Storage urn and coffee output

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/4-5

2/4.8 Coffee valve group urn1 / urn2

The stored coffee flows out of the storage urn via the coffee valve. The output quantity is timer-controlled as a function of the amount of coffee in the urn. The urn can be emptied via the drain valve and the outlet.

Urn2 of the double coffee machine functions and is used in the same manner. 2/4.9 Coffee spout

The coffee spout is removable. A suitable brewing arm can be fitted.

2/4.10 Inlet valves on double coffee machine

The inlet valves are only needed on the combiNation F2. They are fitted in the attachment housing and their purpose is to control filling of the two storage urns.

See“Portioning modes“ Hot water output 2/5.4

Page 278: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/4-6

2/4.11 Urn 2 rinsing valve

The rinsing valve for the second storage urn on the combiNation F2 is located in the attachment housing. It is used to clean (rinse) the storage urn and its period of operation is time-controlled.

Page 279: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/5 Controls

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/5-1

2/5 Controls The front door carries the complete control panel with the start buttons and the touch display. Optionally, the front door is height-adjustable, permitting pots with heights of up to 280 mm to be filled. On machines with a serial number of 20 or higher, with software version 1.0, the software does not permit intermediate positions of the front door. Only the positions "Door up" and "Door down" are permitted. 2/5.1 Front door

The front door can be raised to permit filling of pots (option). With the aid of the switches, the controller detects the position of the front door and the output buttons for the actual door position are enabled. A height-adjustable front door is also available as an option for the double coffee machine.

2/5.1.1 Touch display

The graphic display mounted on the PCB is equipped with an 8*4 touch foil panel to facilitate user guidance. Sharp or pointed objects must not be used on this foil. Functions such as Accounting, etc. are called up via the touch display and can be

access-secured by means of PIN numbers. Further functions, such as accounting, etc., can be called with the touch display. These functions can be protected with the aid of PIN numbers.

See“Service programme“ “Machine Datas“ Software - Part 4

Page 280: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/5-2

2/5.1.2 Start buttons

The control panel of the basic machine has three start buttons. Machines with a height-adjustable front door have four start buttons on the front panel. The portioning modes and quantities can be set as desired for these buttons.

2/5.2 Start buttons for urn2 on double coffee machine

The double coffee machine has a second control panel on the right for dispensing coffee from urn2.

2/5.3 Key switch

The key switch on the machine lid is used to switch the machine on and off. It can also be used to abort brewing. Cleaning cannot be aborted, only interrupted.

ON/OFF switch (key switch) Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5 % Current consumption 5 mA Load resistance 1 k�

Mechanical adjustments Part 5 “Service”

Abrechnen PIN-Nummer Teil 4 „Software“ Kapitel 4/7

(10) (11)

See"Settings" Software - Part 4

"Product data" Service - Part 5

See"Hot water output, hot water portioning modes" 2/5.3

See"Accounting" "PIN number" Software - Part 4

See"Hot water output, hot water portioning modes" 2/5.3

Page 281: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/5 Controls

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/5-3

2/5.4 Hot water dispensing

The hot water button is connected to the front panel by a cable routed behind the glass panel. For control purposes the hot water button is an extension of the dispensing buttons on the control panel.

The following four portioning alternatives are available for hot water dispensing. PortionedPressing a button dispenses the amount of water corresponding to the time setting. Free-flow Water is dispensed as long as the button is held down, but not longer than the limit time. The limit time is the timer setting for the portioned output. Start-StopDispensing of hot water starts when the button is pressed for the first time and continues until the button is pressed again or the limit time is reached. The limit time is the timer setting for the portioned output. Due to the large output amounts (up to 3 litres) and restricted space on the drip tray, a new output mode has become necessary, particularly for the accounting mode: Free-flow, portioned Water is dispensed as long as the button is held down (free flow), but not more than the programmed quantity (portioned). The button may be released and pressed again any number of times until the programmed quantity is reached. The LED in the button blinks until the programmed quantity has been dispensed. If the button is released and not pressed again within a fixed period of 60 seconds, the dispensing operation is cancelled. However, the full programmed quantity is passed to the accounting system.

See“Hot water output” chapter 2/2.3

Page 282: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/5-4

2/5.5 Hot water button

The hot water button is connected directly to the controller.

Hot water button Supply voltage Switched voltage LED supply voltage

12V 5V 12V

Page 283: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/6 Electronics

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/6-1

2/6 Electronics 2/6.1 PCB The PCB for the WMF combiNation F is located behind the front door. The board is fully integrated in the control panel. 2/6.2 Power stage

The power stage contains the following main components: � 5V/12V power supply unit,

supplied by a 9V transformer in the power supply unit

� Digital inputs and output � 24V power outputs with current

measurement � Brewer-motor controller with

current measurement � * Evaluation circuit for

boiler electrode � * Jet-motor controller � CAN interface for internal communication � Two central, 48-pole F connectors � One 6-pole power supply connector � One 12-pole connector for the brewer � Two CAN interface connectors with plug-in

termination resistors "CAN-WID" (default setting is with jumper inserted)

� Display elements (*BW; *NW; +24V; +5V; status; WDI) � Configuration jumpers (J1; J2; J3; J4; J5) � The jumpers should be set as follows:

J1: open J2 to J5: closed

� * Used only on the WMF combiNation S.

Caution!!! High voltages present

Page 284: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/6-2

Page 285: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/7 Electrical system

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/7-1

2/7 Electrical system 2/7.1 Power supply unit

The mains terminals and fuses are located on the front of the power supply unit. Mounting holes are provided for special options such as potential-free switch contact, Sicotronic, second mains connection, special transformers. The fuse values are shown in the wring diagram.

� Mains terminals with pull-relief � 230V mains fuse � Interference filter for the 230V components � 9V-transformer with internal overheating protection to supply the power

stage (5V DC and 12V DC) � 24V transformer with internal overheating protection and external fuse � 24V rectifier and capacitor � Heater relay for the boiler heater � Power-on relay � Heater cable harness; 230V cable harness; 5V/24V cable harness

Page 286: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/7-2

2/7.1.1 Power-on relay (solid-state relay SSR)

The power-on relay switches the 24- volt transformer and 230-volt heaters. It also supplies any optional device connected to the 230 V connection point.

The SSR must always be screwed to the power supply unit with a heat-conducting foil. 2/7.1.2 Transformers The 24 V transformer has a fuse and a thermal device to protect the winding against overheating. The 9 V transformer has only a thermal device to protect the winding against overheating. After an overload, the machine must be disconnected from the mains supply in order to reset the self-locking thermal device. 2/7.1.3 24 V rectifier and filter capacitor The output from the 24 V transformer is rectified and filtered by a rectifier and capacitor. 2/7.1.4 Heater protection relay

All, poles of the heating circuit are disconnected from the mains voltage in the case of a error. The control voltage for the relay is 24 V. On special machine versions (200 V, 220 V or 400 V/13.5 kW) a 24 V coupling relay is used to activate a 230 V circuit breaker capable of handling the higher currents.

Page 287: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/7 Electrical system

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/7-3

2/7.2 Cable forms The cabling of the WMF combiNation F can be divided principally into the 5V/24V main cable form and the 230V main cable form. To avoid errors being overcoupled from the 230V cable form to the 5V/24 cable form, the cable forms are laid separately inside the machine. The two main cable forms are led to one plug at the ground coffee hopper, grinder, brewer and power supply unit interconnecting plugs. 2/7.3 Coupling relay on special voltage versions (ship

version)The coupling relay switches the contactor coil input at 230 V. The coupling relay is energised at 24 V. The coupling relay is required for the contactor with a 230 V coil which switches the power of three x 4.5 kW.

2/7.4 Transformer on special voltage (ship version)

The autotransformer produces the 230 V voltage needed for control purposes. It can be wired for 380 V or 440 V on the input side, according to the ship’s on-board voltage.

Page 288: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/7-4

Page 289: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-1

2/8 Accounting options 2/8.1 Accounting unit SE

The accounting unit (SE) is mounted beside the power stage. The printed circuit board “serial extension” (SE) has its own software and permits connection of the combiNation F, with the aid of various plug-in cards, to

card readers (MDB and 8-price). Without a “piggyback” card, this board permits implementation of a serial connection to ISB or MC3. The board has its own software which provides the currently available functions “serial interface”, “MDB interface” for card readers of coin changers and “8-price interface”. After a reset (power off and on or first run up), the SE is logged onto the CAN bus as a new node. The software (hardware detection) automatically recognises which of the above options is active and provides other menus at various points within the software (such as the main accounting menu in the customer-service programme or the accounting functions in the customer menu). The serial extension (SE) is not needed for accounting via a coin checker. Software version 3,00,00 or higher is required for operation with the serial extension.

MDB-extension

8-price card reader extension

SE board

Page 290: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-2

2/8.1.1 Serial interface 2/8.1.1.1 General

When used as a serial interface, the SE board is installed in the combiNation F in order to extend the machine controller. The serial interface provides a connection between the SE and the accounting system (MC3, ISB). The CAN bus is connected to the power stage and the RS 232 interface (all on connector X3) is connected to an MC 3 or ISB. The waiter-lock is plugged in at connector X1. 2/8.1.1.2 Function Overview The following operating modes are possible when used together with an external MC3 or an ISB: Waiter self-service in debit mode The following operating modes are possible when used together with an external MC3 or an ISB to a suitably enabled cash register: The following operating modes must be supported by the cash register. � Waiter self-service in debit mode � Waiter self-service in debit mode with table number input, with/without

mandatory table input, with/without table protection � Waiter self-service in credit mode for free bar dispensing

(with/without debit) � Waiter self-service in credit mode for a special bar/Credit pen

(with/without debit) � Waiter self-service in credit mode with waiter-related credit

(with/without debit) � Waiter self-service for credit cards in the credit inquiry

(only together with MC3)

SeeDescription of the operating modes chapter 2/9.1.1.3

combiNation

ISB / MC3

KS

SE

X1 X3X3

LST

X3

CAN RS 232

Page 291: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-3

When products are dispensed in waiter self-service mode and debit mode, the dispensed products and the waiter are reported to the ISB or MC3. In the version with table input, the table number is also reported. In credit mode, depending on the settings, the product can be dispensed from the WMF coffee machine: freely if credit is available, with a credit (bar) key (default key No. 61) which can be set as desired, waiter-related by inserting the appropriate waiter key. Waiter self-service (debit) and dispensing on credit can be used in parallel. 2/8.1.1.3 Description of the operating modes Credit mode The waiter creates a credit by ringing up the appropriate product on the cash register. This credit is reported to the SE and the waiter can then dispense the product from a WMF machine The following variants are possible (see the descriptions below): � free credit mode, � credit mode with credit key, � waiter-related credit. Free credit mode No waiter key is needed to dispense the product from the WMF machine. If a credit is available for a product, the ring around the related key on the combiNation lights. If no credit is available and the connection to the cash register is inactive or faulty, no product can be dispensed. Credit mode with credit key The Credit pen is required in order to dispense a product from the WMF machine. Key 61 is defined as the default credit key. Any other waiter key can also be declared as a Credit pen by making the appropriate settings. Only one Credit pen is permitted! If a credit is available for a product, the ring around the related key on the combiNation lights when the valid Credit pen is inserted and the product can be dispensed. If no credit is available and the connection to the cash register is inactive or faulty, no product can be dispensed.

Page 292: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-4

Waiter-related credit mode A waiter key enabled by the cash register is needed for dispensing products from the WMF machine. If a credit is available for the waiter, the ring around the related key on the combiNation lights when the waiter key is inserted and the product can be dispensed. If no credit is available and the connection to the cash register is inactive or faulty, no product can be dispensed. Debit mode In debit mode, each product which is dispensed is stored and, on request (“E”), sent to the cash register. Credit and debit modes may be used in parallel: any existing credit (waiter- or key-related) is first used up, and any further products which are dispensed are stored as debit records. In free bar mode, dispensing on debit is possible only with a waiter key. If the connection to the cash register is inactive or faulty, products can still be dispensed. The data for these products are stored in the machine and, when the connection to the cash register is again available, read in by the cash register (with “E”). Table input If table numbers are used, the table number can be entered on the touch-keys which are displayed after insertion of the waiter key.

There are two possible variants for input of the table number: � without mandatory table input (dispensing for table 0 is possible), � with mandatory table input.

Page 293: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-5

Without mandatory table input When a waiter key is inserted, a table number may be entered. Product dispensing is enabled � If the waiter starts to enter a table number, product dispensing is disabled. � When the input of the table number is terminated with “OK”, the following

is displayed.

Product dispensing is enabled again. � If another waiter is already serving at the table, a cross is

superimposed on the table symbol. With mandatory table input � When an authorised waiter key (in this example, key 2) is inserted, product

dispensing is disabled until a table number has been entered.

� If a table number (in this example, table 1) is entered,

and the input is terminated with “OK”, the following is displayed:

If another waiter is already serving at the table, a cross is superimposed on the table symbol in the table input display.

SeeDescription "Table protection"

SeeDescription "Table protection"

Page 294: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-6

Table protection on When table protection is on, no waiter can dispense products for a table at which another waiter is already serving. Once the bill for the table has been paid, the cash register generates a record which causes the SE to release the table again. Any waiter can now dispense products for this table. Table protection off In this case, the combiNation does not automatically protect and release tables on the basis of product dispensing with input of the table number. The SE must be set to this mode if the table-protection function is managed entirely by a cash register. Notes� If the SE receives a deletion record “C000”, all existing credit are deleted.

The debit data remain unchanged! � In OFFLINE mode, products can be dispensed only as long as a credit is

available. If debit mode is not enabled, no further products can be dispensed when the existing credits have been used up.

� Individual credit data can be deleted with the aid of the related cancel records.

Operation without ISB or external MC3 For operation without an accounting system, for example during commissioning of the machine or if the accounting system is faulty, the function “All free” can be set to “Yes” with the manual dispensing key in the selection menu. We strongly recommend that this function be protected by a specially assigned accounting PIN.

The dispensed products are not recorded if “All free” is active.

Page 295: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-7

2/8.1.1.4 Serial extension (SE) board

Jumper Name Function Default position J100 BOOT Closed:

Open: CPU boot mode active Default mode

Open

J400 CAN-Termination

Closed: Open:

CAN termination resistor 120� No CAN termination resistor

Open

J401 MDB-Modus X4

Posn. 1-2: Posn. 2-3:

MDB interface at X4 deactivated MDB interface at X4 active

Posn. 1-2

J402 RS-Select I Posn. 1-2: Posn. 2-3:

RS232 at X3 active RS422 at X3 active Note: together with J501 and J502

Posn. 1-2

J500 RS422- Termination

Closed: Open:

RS422 termination resistor 120� No RS422 termination resistor

Open

J501 RS-Select II Posn. 1-2: Posn. 2-3:

RS232 (TxD) at X3 active RS422 (RxD422+) at X3 active Note: together with J402 and J502

Posn. 1-2

J502 RS-Select III

Posn. 1-2: Posn. 2-3:

RS232 (RxD) at X3 active RS422 (RxD422-) at X3 active Note: together with J402 and J501

Posn. 1-2

Only one of t he configurable interfaces (MDB / RS232 / RS422) may be activated!

Page 296: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-8

2/8.1.1.5 Interface with cable set

The standard location for the interface (1) is beside the power stage.

2/8.1.1.6 Routing the interface cables

The cable to the accounting system is routed in the factory from the interface connector (2) via the clamping plate and through the side wall (3). It then passes under the cheek on the side wall and down to the strip (4). From there, the cable can be laid under the strip (on the side-wall cover) and either to the front or the rear. As desired.

1

4

2

3

Page 297: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-9

2/8.1.1.7 Waiter lock

The cable from the lock is plugged into the SE.

Page 298: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-10

2/8.1.2 Parallel 2/8.1.2.1 General The SE assembly is extended by the PS-CAN PCB via plug ST 1 (piggy-back board) for operation with external dispensing systems. The PS-CAN assembly has 8 floating contacts (reed relays) and one floating 24 Volt (AC or DC) enabling input. The connection is made to plug ST 2. An enabling switch or key switch can be connected to plug ST 3. The assembly can also be cleared via bridge BR 1 for checking. 8 price categories are available. Products can be switched to common price categories and will then be charged at the same price in the dispensing system. Hot water is set to price category 1 as the default. The dispensing system cannot distinguish between price groups set up in the machine. Product statistics are distorted as a result.

Parallel interface

Dispensing system

LST

KS

CANX3X3

X1ST1

ST2

ST3BRSE

PS-CAN PCB with parallel interface

combiNation

Main buttonpad: double coffee machines,

buttonpad for urn2:

Pot of coffee Mug of coffee Mug of coffee Small pot of coffee

Small pot of coffee Cup of coffee Cup of coffee

See chapter 2/4 „Front door” Part 2 Engineering

Page 299: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-11

2/8.1.2.2 Power supply connection, CAN connection The power supply to the “parallel interface” assembly is connected via the SE power supply plug in the coffee machine (three-pin plug with red and white-grey strands). The CAN bus connection is made at the power stage. The first time the CombiNation is switched on, the SE basic board with the parallel interface is recognized as an additional CAN node. The 5V LED should light at start-up. The Status LED should flash. 2/8.1.2.3 Time sequence of product release

Dispensing system enabling signal (green LED lit) CAN message from SE to front panel (enable) Button LEDs on front panel light up Product key is pressed CAN message from front panel to SE, product is dispensed Price category (reed relay) is switched through by SE (corresp. red LED lit) Product is dispensed Price category (reed relay) is switched off by SE (red LED out)

2/8.1.2.4 Not enabled by dispensing system If a product key is pressed, the front panel recognizes the absence of an enabling message from the SE. 2/8.1.2.5 Not enabled by coffee machine If product dispensing is not possible for operating reasons but has been enabled by the dispensing system, the LEDs in the key rings do not light up. The following status messages, in particular, on the front panel will prevent product dispensing: � Machine OFF � Warming-up phase � No ground coffee / beans on combiNation S � Portioning disabled on combiNation F � No water pressure � Grounds container full � Cleaning Product indicator and rings OFF – message on display

Page 300: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-12

2/8.1.2.6 Parallel extension board

Refer to chapter 2/9.1.1.4 for a description of the jumpers

LED enabling

BR 1

Serial unit (SE) as basic board

ST 2 connection cable form to dispensing unit transfer connector

LEDs price category 1...8 on coil side of relay

5V and CAN connection to SE

LED 5 V

LED status

Page 301: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-13

2/8.2 Vending machines Dimensions of the vending machines External dimensions: Width Overall height Depth

170 mm 600 mm 498 mm

2/8.2.1 Coin checker (MP) The coin checker has two price lines. These can be assigned as desired to the products of the main combiNation machine. Assignment of “free” in the product data of the machine permits free dispensing of the products. The coin checker does not return accepted coins. 2/8.2.1.1 Front panel

Coin slot

Return button

Return opening

Coin drawer

Page 302: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-14

2/8.2.1.2 Switch “Free”

This switch, mounted behind the front panel in the housing of the coin checker, permits free dispensing of all products.

Rated voltage 5 VDC �5% Current consumption 5 mA Load resistance 1 k�

2/8.2.1.3 Checker

The sales prices, coin acceptance and coin blocking are set with the aid of the DIP switches.

2/8.2.1.4 Coin slot

The coin slide can be opened for cleaning.

Coin slide

DIP switches

Page 303: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-15

2/8.2.1.5 Coin drawer

Replacement keys cannot be ordered alone. New keys can be ordered only together with a lock. 2/8.2.1.6 Cable connecting coin checker to main machine

This cable permits connection of the coin checker (MP) option to the main machine.

Page 304: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-16

2/8.2.2 Coin changer (MW) MDB

If the serial extension (SE) with MDB module is used as the master device, one or two vending machines (chip-card reader and coin changer) can be connected in parallel. Alternatively, one chip-card reader and a WMF machine can be connected as slave units.

2/8.2.2.1 Coin slot

Coin slot with coin-return lever.

2/8.2.2.2 Coin tester

The tester in the coin-changer housing can be swung our for cleaning.

Page 305: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-17

2/9.2.2.3 Coin drawer

Coin drawer with return chute and lock.

Replacement keys cannot be ordered alone. New keys can be ordered only together with a lock. 2/8.2.2.4 Coin changer, complete (CF690 Series)

At the top right of the con changer, there is a display which shows the operating states of the unit. Various settings can be made with the keys A, B, C, D and “yellow”. By default, the four tubes are filled with the following coins:

5 Euro cents 10 Euro cents 20 Euro cents 50 Euro cents

Page 306: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-18

2/8.2.2.5 Cable between machine and mounting plate

The coffee machine provides 5 V, CAN and 230 V for the coin changer.

2/8.2.2.6 Display

2/8.2.2.7 Keypad

The parameters for sales are defined with the aid of the built-in foil keypad.

Input with the aid of the foil keypad, MDB Chapter 4/11.2.6.3 Part 4 – “Software

Page 307: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-19

2/8.2.2.8 Serial extension with MDB module

2/8.2.2.9 Power supply unit The power supply unit includes two fuses connected in series. � One is mounted on the transformer � the other in a separate fuse-holder.

24V connector

Connector for return key and key lock

Master mode J1 1-2 J2 1-2 Slave mode J1 2-3 J2 2-3

Connector for 5V and CAN to machine

LEDs for display of data traffic

MDB connector KL, MW, Chip-card reader

Display connector

Page 308: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-20

2/8.2.3 Card reader (KL) MDB

Various card readers can be installed.

2/8.2.3.1 Card reader (KL) (example)

In the picture, the card reader is located behind the foil keypad.

Only type-approved card readers (KL) are WMF-tested.

Page 309: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-21

2/8.2.3.2 Cable connection machine-mounting plate See the cable connection for the coin changer (MDB). 2/8.2.3.3 Display See the display of the coin changer (MDB). 2/8.2.3.4 Keypad

The parameters for sales are defined with the aid of the built-in foil keypad.

2/8.2.3.5 Serial extension with MDB module

Configuration is carried out with the jumpers. Settings are made with the foil keypad and the display of the combiNation.

See2/9.2.2.8 SE module

Input with the aid of the foil keypad, MDB Chapter 4/11.2.6.3

Input with the aid of the foil keypad, MDB Chapter 4/11.2.6.3

Page 310: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-22

2/8.2.4 Card reader (KL) 8-price

Eight price lines are available. The card reader assigns each price line to a sales price. Which is then subtracted from the credit on the inserted card (function of the KL). It is also possible to assign products to a common price line and these are then charged at the same price in the card reader (KL). Assignment of a product to the price line “free” permits free dispensing of the product.

The card reader cannot distinguish between price groups defined in the coffee machine. This means that the product statistics in the card reader (KL) will be falsified. 2/8.2.4.1 Product release sequence

Card is inserted in KL and a product key is pressed. Key is signalled to the SE via the CAN. Price line ( PL ) connected to KL on 8-price option (red LED on). KL tests the card. KL connects the Pl with low resistance (green LED on). Timeout 0.2..20s 8-price option detects release at input - CAN message “Release to FB”. FB starts output – sales confirmation "K0 off" for 2s (adjustable). Product output ......... Product is dispensed.

The card reader (KL) needs the product selection on the coffee machine in order to select the price and to decide whether there is sufficient credit on the card. The product price appears on the card-reader display, even if no card is inserted.

SeeSetting card reader Service chapter 4/12.2.6.4 Part 4 - software

Page 311: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-23

Normal sequence � LED rings on the front panel (FB) are “On”. � Card is inserted and the credit is shown on the card-reader display (such as

GiroVend). � Product key is pressed – ring OFF. � All other products and rings OFF when card reader (KL) releases output. � Product output starts – ring blinks / product indicator on. � Product output complete – rings “ON” and all product indicators ON. No release from card reader (KL) � Product key is pressed – ring OFF. � Card-reader timeout (adjustable, default 1s) elapses. � Ring “ON” – see the message on the card-reader display. No release by coffee machine The following status signals prevent output of the products: � Machine OFF � Warming-up phase � No ground coffee/beans on combiNation S � Portioning disabled on combiNation F � No water pressure � Grounds container full � Cleaning � Product indicator and rings OFF –message on display Since the coffee machine prevents interrogation via the price line, nothing can be subtracted from the credit on the card. 2/8.2.4.2 Transfer connector, 8-price

Page 312: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-24

LED 24V(yellow) LED status (yellow)

LED K0 (red)

LED 12V (yellow)

LEDs for price Lines 24V side

(green)

LEDs for price lines 1...8 on the 5V side

(red)

Serial extension (SE) as basic board 33 2184 0000

Connector for cable to card reader

Connector for 5Vand CAN

2/8.2.4.3 Card reader (KL) (example) The front panel is manufactured specially for the card reader (KL) being used. 2/8.2.4.4 Cable between machine and mounting plate See cable connection for coin changer (MDB) 2/8.2.4.5 SE module

Page 313: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/8 Acconting options

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-25

2/8.2.4.6 Power supply unit

The fuse protects the primary side of the transformer.

Page 314: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/8-26

2/8.3 WMF Multicounter (MC) CAN

Page 315: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/2 Cleaning

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/9-1

2/9 Cleaning 2/9.1 Automatic cleaning with granulate The cleaning granulate must have the specified solidity. If this is not the case, the granules can break down and cannot be portioned correctly. If there is no cleaning module installed in the machine, the cleaner is inserted through the manual input. The reed switch in the mounting frame and the magnet in the cover of the manual input, combined with the user guidance on the display, permit input of the cleaner to be monitored. 2/9.1.1 Cleaning granulate portioner, complete

The granulate hopper is designed as a chamber-type portioner. The motor is connected to the portioner via gears. The current monitoring circuit detects jamming of the drive motor.

The functions of the individual components are described below. Granulate hopper drive Rated voltage: 24 V DC Operating current: < 0,2 mA

If jamming of the granulate motor is detected, the mechanism travels back and forth up to 50 times in an attempt to free up the hopper. Emergency cleaning: after two unsuccessful attempts to carry out automatic cleaning if the granulate motor is jammed, the system changes over to manual cleaning.

Page 316: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/9-2

2/9.1.2 Granulate light barrier with solenoid

The amount of cleaner is determined by counting the number of granules with the aid of a focussed light barrier. A 24 V solenoid is used to mechanically lock the inlet chute.

Cleaning granulate hopper Clenaing- light barrier Rated voltage: 5 V DC ± 5 % Current consumption: 5 mA

Resistance value 1 k� Timeout pulses 1,2 s between the pulses

2/9.1.3 Soleonid

A 24 V solenoid is used to mechanically lock the inlet chute.

Cleaning granulate hopper - solenoid Rated voltage: 24 V DC Current consumption: < 0,2 mA

Empty signal The interval between two sequential granules is monitored in order to determine when the hopper is empty. The normal interval between two granules is about 500 ms. If no second granule is detected within 1500 ms, the empty condition is reported with a message on the display. Cleaning continues with the number of granules already portioned into the machine. Cleaning continues once only after a time limit of 10 minutes without filling the hopper. At the next cleaning cycle the machine remains idle until the hopper is filled. The “empty” message will only disappear when acknowledged and not for example upon switching the power OFF and ON.

Page 317: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/10 Chocolate dispenser

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/10-1

2/10 combiNation chocolate dispenser 2/10.1 Chocolate powder hopper (CPH)

The hopper is an auger hopper. The quantity portioned is dispensed on a time control basis. The input nozzle setting on the hopper guarantees even distribution of the powder in the hopper.

2/10.1.1 Empty message

When the hopper is empty, a light barrier controls switching off. If the control unit detects an empty message from the light barrier, this message is stored and a message is displayed on the main machine. All further product preparation is disabled. The operator has to confirm that the hopper has been filled. Confirmation is only accepted by the control unit if the light barrier detects

powder at the same time. Portioning in progress is then continued. If the red LED on the receiver assembly is lit, this indicates that it is connected to the 5 volt supply.

Transmitter Receiver

Light barrier transmitter 24 V DC 1A Light barrier receiver 5 V DC

(+/-5%) 20 mA; 1k�; if the red LED is lit, the receiver is connected to the 5V supply.

Page 318: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/10-2

2/10.1.2 Chocolate powder hopper (CPH) motor The motor is connected to the hopper auger via a geared connection.

Hopper motor: time-controlled Rated voltage: 24 V DC Inhibit current: 8 A Operating current: 1.4 A < 2 A Rated speed: 250 rpm

2/10.1.3 Base unit

2/10.1.4 Auger

Clogging of the CPH indicates that the auger is ‘compressed’ and should be replaced by a new one.

Page 319: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/10 Chocolate dispenser

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/10-3

2/10.2 Chocolate dispenser piping system

The boiler in the main machine supplies the hot water required to prepare a chocolate product. In the combiNation S, portioning with too-hot water is avoided by admixture of cold water. Admixture of cold water is not necessary when connected to the combiNation F.

2/10.2.1 Chocolate dispenser hot water valve (heated)

The hot water valve (time-controlled) sends hot water from the boiler to the hopper (mixer assembly).

Hot water valve 24V (+/-20%) 400 mA

2/10.2.2 HW valve aperture

The rate of flow is determined by a fixed aperture (� 1.3 mm).

Page 320: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/10-4

2/10.2.3 HW valve heating (PTC heating) The chocolate dispenser hot water valve is heated by means of PTC heating to ensure that the dispensing temperature is as constant as possible. PTC resistor surface temperature 140°C +/-10°C Rated voltage 230V AC 2/10.2.4 Chocolate dispenser cold water valve

The cold water valve (time-controlled) sends cold water via the adjustable aperture to the hot water valve. When connected to the combiNation F, the cold water valve is not required and is disabled.

Error procedure Valve monitoring The valves are monitored with a 1-minute limit time. In other words, after operating for one minute, they are forced to switch off. A message is shown in the display. The number of errors occurring is stored in the error memory as information for the service engineer. 2/10.2.5 Adjustable aperture

The adjustable aperture is located on the right next to the mixer housing, with the front panel opened. The aperture is disabled when connected to the combiNation F.

Seeillustration 2/10.2.1 HW valve

See“Mechanical adjustments”Part 5 – “Service”

Page 321: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/10 Chocolate dispenser

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/10-5

2/10.2.6 Hot water connection to combiNation

T-piece

Aperture nipple

Connection (Extension)

Hose to Chocolate HW valve

A T-piece plug connection is additionally fitted on the combiNation F. A 1.1 aperture is needed in order to reduce the quantity of water.

SeePiping diagram Part 6 - “drawings”

Page 322: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/10-6

2/10.3 Mixer system

The mixer comprises the hopper, mixer housing, mixer motor with interference filter and mounted rotor. Chocolate products are prepared in flow mode. Hot water is mixed with the chocolate powder in the hopper. The mixture is then beaten in the adjacent mixer to make a creamy product.

Error procedure Mixer monitoring To protect the mixer module, a “check switch” is fitted to act as a monitor. This switches off the motor after one minute if it does not run according to the program sequence. A message is shown in the display. The number of errors occurring is stored in the error memory as information for the service engineer. 2/10.3.1 Mixer motor with interference filter

Because of the gasket, the mixer motor cannot be replaced on its own.

2/10.3.2 SSR

The SSR for the mixer motor is located on the tie-bar behind the mixer panel.

Page 323: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/10 Chocolate dispenser

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/10-7

2/10.3.3 Mixer housing with hopper,

angle connection and pipe

The mixture of hot water and the chocolate powder is beaten to a creamy product in the mixer housing.

2/10.3.4 Fan

The role of the fan is as far as possible to prevent jamming of the input nozzle (hopper) and powdery dust and damp entering the chocolate dispenser.

2/10.4 Adjustable spout

The product spout ensures that the product flows evenly into the container placed underneath. It has a 35 mm adjustment range and the maximum clear height underneath is 150 mm. The spout may be pulled forward and removed for cleaning.

See“Mechanical adjustments”Part 5 - Service

Page 324: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/10-8

2/10.5 Door switch/safety switch

The role of the safety switch is to disconnect the 24 V and the 230 V power supply.

2/10.6 Controls 2/10.6.1 Front panel/dispensing key

A single-row control panel (maximum 3 buttons) is implemented. The acrylic glass covers can be removed by pressing on one side of the cover and at the same time sliding it towards the edge. When a button is pressed, the product is dispensed (portioned) in accordance with the settings.

Page 325: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/11 Grounds ejector

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/11-1

2/11 Grounds ejector 2/11.1 Principle of operation

The incoming mixture of rinsing water and grounds (1) passes over a filter (2). As the mixture slides down this filter, some of the rinsing water runs off (3). The remaining grounds (4), which still contain some water, then drop into the grounds container (5), where the remaining water (6) is removed. The rinsing water (3) and the remaining water (6) flow into the drain (7).

The mixture of grounds and rinsing water passes through a further filter, where the water is removed. The grounds fall into a grounds container with a sieve at the bottom. The grounds container can be removed from the machine without dripping and can then be emptied.

Page 326: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/11-2

2/11.2 Upper section with first filter

The first filter is located in the upper section of the grounds ejector. The removal sieve has a bayonet fixing device and can be removed for cleaning. The first filter will operate correctly only if it is not blocked. 2/11.2.1 Rinsing nozzle

The pressure of the incoming water cause the nozzle to rotate so that its jets spray the entire first-filter sieve. The water for this nozzle is connected via a hose from the coffee machine to the nozzle. A solenoid valve in the coffee machine initiates a rinsing operation at regular intervals.

2/11.2.2 Sieve of first filter

The mixture of grounds and water entering the grounds ejector enters the first filter. The water dripping out of the mixture in this filter drips into the overflow tray. The remaining mixture of grounds and water passes through the opening in the first filter and falls into the grounds container.

See"Machine Datas" Software - Part 4

Page 327: Training Manual CombiNationF

2/11 Grounds ejector

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/11-3

2/11.3 Frame The frame consists of the drip tray and a rear wall. A 1½" flange for the drain connection is screwed to the drip tray. The feet, whose height can be adjusted, are screwed to the rear wall. The unit is designed for use as a free-standing unit. However, the feet can be turned to permit it to be suspended from the counter. 2/11.4 Grounds container

The grounds container is made of plastic (PE). Any water dripping out of the collected grounds can be filtered through the sieve in the container. The sieve is held in the container by a captive nut. It can be removed for cleaning. The base of the container is reinforced with a sheet-metal plate.

2/11.4.1 Container sieve

Page 328: Training Manual CombiNationF

Engineering

© WMF combiNation F edition 08/2004 - OTS

2/11-4

2/11.4.2 Ball valve

The grounds container has a ball valve to prevent dripping when the container is removed for emptying. When the container is removed from the frame of the grounds ejector, the ball closes the drain outlet of the container.

2/11.5 Grounds sensor with height adjustment

A capacitive level sensor is used to prevent the grounds container from overflowing. When the grounds reach a preset level, a "full" signal is generated. An additional sheet-metal plate which moves in front of the sensor when the container is not in the machine permits detection of whether or not the container is in position.

From Mod. 2, this can be mounted on the right if desired.

Page 329: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/0 Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/0-1

Part 1 - Basics 1

Page 330: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/0-2

Page 331: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-1

1/1 General information

The WMF combiNation F is a fully automatic coffee machine for making filter coffee and hot water. The coffee can be dispensed into cups, mugs, small pots and large pots.

The brewing system permits the preparation of one or two litres of coffee. Each fresh brew flows into a storage urn, from which it can then be dispensed.

The (optional) height-adjustable front door permits filling of coffee pots with a height of up to 280 mm without problems.

The user of the machine is guided by menus displayed on a graphical touch-screen display.

Page 332: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-2

The individual machine parts are labelled and described briefly below. Detailed descriptions of the operation of individual components can be found in Part 2 - Engineering.

1

2

3

4

5

7

6 11

8

9

10

12

13

Page 333: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-3

1/1.1 Designation of machine parts

1 Ground-coffee hopper See chapter 2/1

2 Coffee storage urn See chapter 2/4

3 Cleaning-granulate hopper See chapter 2/9

4 Touch-screen display See chapter 2/5

5 Control panel See chapter 2/5

6 Coffee spout See chapter 2/4

7 Drip tray

8 Insertion flap See chapter 2/1

9 On/Off key switch See chapter 2/5

10 Hot water button See chapter 2/5

11 Hot water spout See chapter 2/5

12 Height-adjustable front door See chapter 2/5

13 Start buttons See chapter 2/5

Page 334: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-4

1/1.2 Description of components The combiNation F is of modular construction and is configured at the factory specifically for the customer. Many of the modules can also be retrofitted on site at the customer’s premises. There are two kinds of modules: basic modules, which are always required in any version, and optional modules, which can be selected as options. In addition, there are three standard versions of the WMF combiNation F with fixed modules. See

“Standard versions” chapter 1/1.3

“Technical Data” chapter 1/1.5

Page 335: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-5

1/1.2.1 Basic modules

Version Description

Basic model Single coffee machine 1 type (brand) of coffee (1 GCH and 1 urn) Double coffee machine 2 types (brands) of coffee (2 GCH and 2 urn) Power400 V / 9.3 kW Power supply 400 V / 9.3 kW 200 V / 9.4 kW Japan Power supply 200 V / 9.4 kW Japan 380 V / 9.4 kW USA Power supply 380 V / 9.4 kW USA 400 V / 13.5 kW Power supply 400 V/13.5 kW 3/PE 440V/9,3kW without neutral Power supply 3/PE 440V 50/60Hz 9.3kW CNF3

phases without neutral (ship) 2x3/PE(3x3kW)440V power supply 2x3/PE(3x3kW)440V (ship) 3/PE 230V/9,3kW Norway Power supply 3/PE 230V /9,3kW Norway 3/PE 380V/12,5kW without neutral Power supply 3/PE 380V 50/60HZ 12,5kW CNF3

phases without neutral (ship) 3/PE 230V/13,5kW Norway Power supply 3/PE 230V /13,5kW Norway 9.3KW CNF without neutral 9,3KW CNF 3 phases without neutral 2x3/PE(3x3kW)400V 3X3 power supply 2x3/PE(3x3kW)400V (ship) Hot water output 1 x HW 1HW, 1 x hot water spout on front without HW OHW, without hot water spout Automatic cleaning Automatic portioning of cleaning granulate automatic portioning of cleaning granulate Manual granulate input manual input of cleaning granulate Grounds ejectionWith grounds ejection connection With grounds ejection connection Without grounds ejection connection Without grounds ejection connection Design packageAluminium Design package in aluminium look Beechwood Design package in beechwood look Anthracite Design package in anthracite look Basics Basic package without trim

(for customising) Seeberger Blu Design package Seeberger Blu: Heimbs Allegretto Design package/Frontpanel Heimbs cNF Connection for chocolate dispenser With chocolate dispenser With chocolate dispenser (lockable) cNF Without chocolate dispenser Without chocolate dispenser Prepared for connection Prepared for connection of a chocolate dispenser cNF

Page 336: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-6

1/1.2.2 Optional modules

Version Description

Back panel Design back aluminium Design insert; back panel, aluminium Design back beechwood Design insert, back panel, beechwood Design back anthracite Design insert, back panel, anthracite Design back Basic Design insert, back panel, basic, without

décor (for customized Designs) Foreign language Japanese Display language Japanese American Display language American English Spanish Display language Spanish French Display language French Dutch Display language Dutch Italian Display language Italian Norwegian Display language Norwegian Swedish Display language Swedish Finish Display language Finish Self-service package With self-service package With self-service package Grounds ejection With Grounds ejection With Grounds ejection Vending unit Coin checker With electronic coin checker Coin changer With coin changer Card reader, 8 price Card reader housing and 8-price interface Card reader MDB Card reader housing and MDB interface

Money card reader MDB Money card reader housing and MDB interface

Card reader MDB left Card reader housing and MDB interface mounted left

Waiter card system Waiter card insert Waiter lock insert for waiter cards Waiter keys/ cards Waiter keys 1-6 Waiter keys no. 1-6 Waiter keys 1-12 Waiter keys no. 1-12 Waiter cards 1-6 Waiter cards no. 1-6 Waiter cards 1-12 Waiter cards no. 1-12

Page 337: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-7

Version Description

Accounting system Parallel interface Parallel interface for external accounting without

waiter lock Serial interface Waiter lock and serial interface for Hogatron Serial Interface with table Waiter lock and serial interface for Hogatron

with table Parallel interface with waiter lock Parallel interface with waiter lock Multicounter Integrated multicounter, waiter lock Hogatron waiter lock, ser.interface.w. table

Waiter keys no. 1-6

Hogatron waiter lock old, par. interface Hogatron waiter lock, par. interface with table Hogatron waiter lock new, par. interface Hogatron waiter lock old, par.interface Serial interface without waiter lock Hogatron waiter lock new, ser.interface Rear Tap 1 x HW + 1 x coffee rearside 1 x dosed coffee + 1 x dosed HW rearside spout Adjustable front door With height-adjustable front door With height-adjustable front door Speacial size coffee hopper 1 GCH 5 kg 1 Ground-coffee hopper with 5 kg 2 GCH 5 kg 2 Ground-coffee hopper with 5 kg Energy optimisation Connection energy optimisation Connection to a energy optimisation installation

Feet (not ship version) With feet With feet With feet, double coffee With feet, double coffee

Page 338: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-8

Version Description

Special versions Bundesbahn Deutsche Bundesbahn (German Rail) ship version ship version Card reader Card-reader case, external Card-reader case, external Cash-card readers Card-reader case, internal Card-reader case, internal Connection for existing card reader Connection for existing card reader 8-price card Card reader with 8-price card Cash-card reader MDB Cash-card reader MDB Connection for chocolate dispenser With chocolate dispenser With chocolate dispenser cN With chocolate dispenser (lockable) With chocolate dispenser (lockable) cN Without chocolate dispenser Without chocolate dispenser Prepared for connection Prepared for connection of a chocolate

dispenser cNF

Page 339: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-9

1/1.3 Standard versions WMF combiNation F All the standard models of the WMF combiNation F are listed in the table below.

Type Configuration03.8700.005x Single coffee machine, 9 kW 03.8700.001x Single coffee machine, 9 kW, hot water (HW) 03.8700.002x Single coffee machine, 9 kW, hot water (HW),

height-adjustable front door (HFR) 03.8700.003x Single coffee machine, 9 kW, hot water (HW),

automatic granulate portioning (ADR) 03.8700.004x Single coffee machine, 9 kW, hot water (HW),

automatic granulate portioning (ADR), height-adjustable front door (HFR)

03.8700.006x Single coffee machine, 9 kW, height-adjustable front door (HFR)

03.8700.007x Single coffee machine, 9 kW, automatic granulate portioning (ADR)

03.8700.008x Single coffee machine, 9 kW, automatic granulate portioning (ADR), height-adjustable front door (HFR)

1/1.4 Upgrade modules for WMF combiNation F The following table shows all upgrade modules for the WMF combiNation F.

Existing machine To be upgraded to Comments Ground-coffee portioner Normal GCH Special-size GCH Power13.5 kW 9 kW 9 kW 13.5 kW

Group leader must inspect and document. Request new rating plate internally, return old rating plate.

Front door Without height-adjustable front door

With height-adjustable front door

Grounds ejector Without grounds ejector With grounds ejector

Page 340: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-10

Existing machine To be upgraded to Comments CleaningManual cleaning, single coffee

Granulate portioner

Manual cleaning, double coffee

Granulate portioner

Hot water Without hot water With hot water Back panel With design back panel Design trim, back panel,

aluminium With design back panel Design trim, back panel,

beechwoodWith design back panel Design trim, back panel,

anthraciteWith design back panel Design trim, back panel,

basicStandard back panel Design back panel

Aluminium Standard back panel Design back panel

BeechwoodStandard back panel Design back panel Anthracite Standard back panel Design back panel Basic Energy optimisation Without energy optimisation

With energy optimisation

Self-service package Without cup stops With self-service package Feet (not ship version) Without feet, double coffee

With feet, double coffee

Without feet With feet Accounting/Waiter lock No MC-SE fitted Basic MC-SE module MC-SE already in machine

MC 3 extension

Without waiter lock With waiter lock (only together with SE) Chocolate dispenser Without chocolate With chocolate Chocolate dispenser

itself has to be ordered over sales department.

Page 341: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-11

1/1.5 Rating plate information

Rated power 9.3 kW / 13.8 kW

Electrical data 3/N/PE 50 Hz 400 V 9,3 kW Water boiler Water capacity

Water capacity 6,5 l

Permissible working excess pressure

3.2 bar

Permissible feed temperature 125°CThermal output 9.0 kW / 13 kW

Two copies of the rating plate are made up. The duplicate is marked “Copy”

Page 342: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-12

1/1.6 Technical data

Rated power * 9.3 kW 13.8 kW Hourly output ** Filter coffee 430 cups 500 cups Storage urn 4.0 litres each Hot water output, total 72 l/h 108 l/h Ground-coffee hopper 2.2 kg Cleaning granulate portioner 1.05 kg Supply voltage * 3/N/PE 50 Hz/400 V External dimensions: Width, single coffee machine Width, double coffee machine Height with ground-coffee hopperDepth

450 mm 700 mm 810 mm

590 mm Empty weight: Single coffee machine Double coffee machine

approx. 68 kg -

Continuous sound-pressure level (Lpa)*** < 70 dB (A)

Heat output Standby mode Full load *

200 W 9150 W

200 W 13650 W

Subject to technical change without notice.

* The above values are for the basic version of the machine; see the rating plate of special versions for the applicable values.

** The hourly outputs indicated are GUIDELINES and depend on the following factors: quantity of ground coffee, type of coffee, brewing temperature, brewing aperture size, brewing pressure, water hardness and general condition of the machine (e.g. lime scale, connections, power, water, sequence, wear, etc.)

*** The A-weighted mean sound pressure level Lpa (slow) and Lpa (impulse) at the operator’s workplace is below 70 dB(A) in every operating mode.

If the local water has a carbonate hardness of more than 9° (German hardness), a WMF water filter Standard or a WMF Water filter Jumbo must be installed in the supply line to the machine.

Page 343: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-13

1/1.6.1 Conditions of use and installation The user of the machine must have the preparations for installation carried out. These must be done by licensed fitters in accordance with all general and local regulations. The WMF Service personnel are not authorised to carry out such work and are not responsible for its execution!

Rated power 9.3 kW 13.8 kW Connecting cable, site * 5 x 2,52 5 x 4² Fuse, site supply 3 x 16 A 3 x 25 A

Mains voltage tolerance 230 V/400 V + 6 % - 10 % Mains droop-outs of <50 ms do not affect operation of the machine

Water feed line TW15(DN 15 /1/2") with locally provided dirt filter, flow pressure at least 2 bar at a flow rate of 8 l/min, maximum pressure 6 bar

Water quality If the local water has a carbonate hardness of more than 9° dKH (German carbonate hardness), a WMF water filter must be installed in the supply line.

Water drain line At least DN 40 (1 ½“), minimum gradient 2 cm/m

Ambient temperature + 5°C to + 35°C (drain the water system in case of frost)

Maximum humidity

Degree of protection

80 % relative humidity without condensation. Do not spray the machine with water. Do not use the machine outdoors! IP 30

Installation clearances For operating, servicing and safety reasons, the machine should be installed with clearance of not less than 50 mm at the back and sides from the building or non-WMF components. A clear height of 1100 mm from the top of the supporting surface should be ensured. The height of the supporting surface from the floor should be not less than 700 mm and not more than 900 mm. If the machine connections are to be routed down through the counter, remember to allow space for the connections. These may restrict the available space below the machine.

Installation dimensions (WxHxD) for water filter

Standard: 250 x 500 x 400 mm Jumbo: 290 x 670 x 420 mm

Page 344: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-14

* The local electrical system must comply with IEC 364. For greater safety, an earth leakage circuit breaker with a rated error current of 30 mA (EN 61008) should be fitted in the supply line to the machine. For a single-phase connection, an earthed socket should be fitted in the vicinity of the machine. For a three-phase connection, a 5-pole CEE/CEKON socket to EN 63009 should be fitted. If the power lead to this machine is damaged, it must be replaced by WMF Service or a similarly qualified specialist. If the machine is permanently connected to the mains supply, an all-pole circuit breaker (main switch) to DIN VDE 660 with not less than 3 mm contact opening must be fitted ahead of the machine. In the case of a flexible connection, we recommend fitting a disconnection device. Do not allow the power lead to come into contact with hot components. The main switch and socket must be provided by the customer. The machine must not be installed with a fixed site connection if used with a trolley (mobile station).*)

Page 345: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-15

1/1.6.2 Technical data - motors

Brewer Motor Rated voltage: 24 V ( 20%) Operating current: 0.3 - 2.8 A < 3 A Inhibit current: 8A (5.8 A) Rated speed: 250 U/min Cleaning motor Rated voltage: 24 V ( 20%) Operating current: 0.9 A < 2 A Inhibit current: Rated speed: Pulse generator (brewer limit switch) Rated voltage: 5 V DC ( 5%) Current consumption: 5 mA Load resistor: 1k 1 pulse per revolution of the rotor shaft Ground coffee hopper drive Motor Rated voltage: 24 V DC Operating current: 1.4 A < 2 A Inhibit current: 8 A Rated speed: 250 U/min Pulse generator Rated voltage: 5 V DC ± 5 % Current consumption: 5 mA Load resistor: 1k 1 pulse per revolution of the rotor shaft Granulate hopper drive Rated voltage: 24 V DC Operating current: < 0,2 mA

Page 346: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-16

1/1.6.3 Technical data - valves

Valve Rated voltage Current consumption NotesBrewing valve 24V (±20%) 420mA (±20%) normally closed Rinsing inlet valve 24V (±20%) 420mA (±20%) normally closed Rinsing outlet valve, brewer 24V (±20%) 420mA (±20%) normally closed

Rinsing outlet valve, grounds ejector

24V (±20%) 420mA (±20%) normally closed

Hot water valve 24V (±20%) 420mA (±20%) normally closed Rinsing valve Urn1 24V (±20%) 420mA (±20%) normally closed

Drain valve urn1 24V (±20%) 700mA (±20%) normally closed Coffee output valve urn1 24V (±20%) 680mA (±20%) normally closed

Jet valve urn1 24V (±20%) 420mA (±20%) normally closed Inlet valve urn1 24V (±20%) <1000mA (±20%) normally closed

Jet valve urn2 24V (±20%) <420mA (±20%) normally closed double coffee version only

Rinsing valve urn2 24V (±20%) <420mA (±20%) normally closed

double coffee version only

Drain valve urn2 24V (±20%) <700mA (±20%) normally closed double coffee version only

Coffee output valve urn2 24V (±20%) <680mA (±20%) normally closed

double coffee version only

Inlet valve urn2 24V (±20%) <1000mA (±20%) normally closed double coffee version only

Page 347: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-17

1/1.6.4 Technical data - heaters

Heater Rated voltage Current consumption Rated power

Boiler heater 400 V ( 10%) < 16 A (11.2 A)

3x4,5 kW tubular heaters, delta connection

Boiler heater 230 V ( 10%) < 16 A (13.5 A)

3x3,0 kW tubular heaters, star connection

Special versions for 200 Volt/220 V with delta connection. Wires adapted to carry the higher current. Urn heater 230 V <0.3 A Peak power-on current

1.6AHeater for flexible coffee hose

24 V Rated power 13 (+4) W

1/1.6.5 Technical data - relays

Relay Actuation voltage Current consumption NotesCircuit breaker 9 kW 24 V DC Circuit breaker 13,5 kW 24 V DC Coupling replay 13,5 kW 230 V DC 50/60 Hz Only with 13,5

kW to activate the contactor

1/1.6.6 Technical data - miscellaneous

Part Voltage NotesGrounds sensor (capacitive)

12 V supply Switches 5 V

LED on sensor; green: 12V present red: undefined state yellow off: touching

Boiler temperature sensor

Rated voltage Current consumption Resistance values:

5 V DC ± 5 % 5 mA 25°C: 3000 (± 150) 90°C: 275 (± 25 )95°C: 236 (± 25 )

Cleaning granulate hopper - barrier with solenoid Rated voltage:: 24 V DC Current consumption: < 0,2 mA Cleaning granulate hopper - light barrier Rated voltage:: 5 V DC ± 5 % Current consumption: 5 mA

Resistance value 1 kTimeout impulse 1,2 s between the impulses.

Page 348: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-18

Part Voltage Notes

Water-pressure switch 5 V DC ± 5 %

Level controller 12 V DC Tank empty: 1.0V ± 0.3 V Tank full (4 litres): 4.0 V ± 0.3 V

Reflective light barrier

Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5%Currentconsumption 5 mA Load resistance 1 k

FM Supply voltage 5 V

Control panel, complete

Supply voltages 5 V/12 V Internal CAN interface Serial Service interface External CAN interface

Hot water button Supply voltage12 V Switches 5 V 12 V for LED

Key switch 5 V, normally open On: closed Reed switch, front door bottom/top, coffee output urn1 and urn2

Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5% Currentconsumption 5 mA Load resistance 1 k

Switch for input flap Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 5% Currentconsumption 5 mA Load resistance 1 k

Fan Rated voltage 24 V DC Current consumption <300 mA

Page 349: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/1 General information

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-19

1/1.6.7 Technical data – chocolate dispenser

Technical data – motors Hopper motor Rated voltage: 24 V DC Operating current: 1.4 A < 2 A Inhibit current: 8 A Rated speed: 250 rpm Mixer motor Rated voltage: 230 V AC 50 Hz Current consumption: < 400 mA Speed: >= 8000 rpm Mode 40 % ED Short-time mode 6 min Direction of rotation Counter-clockwise

(looking at shaft end) Fan Rated voltage: 24 V DC Current consumption: < 0.3 A Technical data – valves and miscellaneous Hot water valve 24V (+/-20%) 400 mA Cold water valve 24V (+/-20%) 400 mA Light barrier, transmitter

24 V DC 1A

Light barrier, receiver 5 V DC (+/- 5%) 20 mA; 1kWhen the red LED is lit, this indicates that the receiver is connected to the 5 V supply.

Impulse sender 5 V DC (+/- 5%) 5 mA; 1k ; pulse duration 20 ms; 1 pulse per rotation of the rotor shaft

Door switch/ safety switch (machine switch)

5 V DC ± 5 % 5 mA; 1k ; 12 V DC 40 mA per LED path

HW valve heating(PTC heating)

PTC resistor Surface temperature 140°C +/- 10°C Rated voltage 230V

Page 350: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/1-20

Page 351: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/2 Connection

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-1

1/2 Connecting the WMF combiNation F

1/2.1 Preparing for connection The site and the environment need to be carefully prepared before connecting up the machine. Particular attention must also be paid to ensuring compliance with the safety instructions.

The machine operator must arrange for the site preparatory work. This should be carried out by an approved contractor in accordance with general and local regulations.Ducts and holes drilled through counters or supporting surfaces should be dimensioned so that there is no contact with live parts. In special cases, an earthed cover panel should be fitted. WMF SERVICE technicians are not authorised to carry out installation work on site and will not be responsible for such work. WMF SERVICE technicians are only permitted to connect up the machine to the prepared connections.

Planning information to assist with preparation for connection is supplied with the WMF combiNation F or can be obtained after purchase from the following address:

WMF Aktiengesellschaft . Coffee Machine Sales Postfach 1401 . D-73309 Geislingen/Steige . Germany

Tel. 0 73 31 / 25 85 76 . Fax 0 73 31 / 25 81 70 E-Mail [email protected]

Page 352: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-2

1/2.2 Checklist in preparation for connection

Siting the machine

� This machine is not for use out of doors. � The ambient temperature range is +5°C to 35°C. (Drain the water

system if there is a risk of frost.) � The maximum relative humidity should not exceed 80 %. No

dewing, do not spray the machine with water. � For operating, service and safety reasons the machine should be

installed with clearance of not less than 50 mm at the back and sides from the building or non-WMF components. A clear height of 1100 mm from the top of the supporting surface should be ensured. The height of the supporting surface from the floor surface should be not less than 700 mm and not more than 900 mm. Use of the area below the machine for accessories (such as the water filter or grounds ejector) requires a clear height of between 500 and 670 mm, depending on the configuration and local installation conditions. If the machine connections are to be routed down through the counter, remember also to allow space for the connections. These may restrict the available space below the machine. The site should have a minimum load-bearing capacity of 95 kg and should be accessible on all sides.

Page 353: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/2 Connection

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-3

Electrical connectionThe electric wiring is part of the site installation and should be led up to the immediate vicinity of the machine. The following connections should be provided:

� The site electrical system must comply with IEC 364. � 400 V three-phase current connection.

(3/N/PE 50Hz 400 V; rated power 9.3 kW / 13.8 kW). � The mains voltage tolerance is + 6 % bis -10 %. � Operation of the machine is not affected by

power cuts under < 50 ms. � For greater safety, an earth leakage circuit breaker with a rated

error current of 30 mA (EN 61008) should be fitted in the supply line to the machine.

� In the vicinity of the machine or 30 cm below the counter surface, for a single-phase connection a shock-proof socket and for a three-phase connection a 5-pole CEE/CEKON socket to EN 60309 should be fitted by the customer to the back or side of the counter base.

� If the power lead to this machine is damaged, it must be replaced by WMF SERVICE or a similarly qualified specialist.

� If the machine is permanently connected on site, an all-pole circuit breaker (main switch) to EN 60947 with not less than 3 mm contact opening should preferably be fitted ahead of the machine. In the case of a flexible connection, the circuit breaker is recommended.

� The power lead must not be allowed to come into contact with hot components.

� The main switch and socket are part of the customer’s system. � The machine must not be installed with a permanent site connection

if used with a trolley (mobile location). � No other loads should be connected to the power supply.

Page 354: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-4

Water connection

� A stop valve (preferably a ball valve) of sufficient dimension and a dirt trap, mesh size 0.2 mm to 0.25 mm should be fitted to the water supply line in an accessible position in the counter base.

� The drain line should be not less than DN 40 (1 ½“) and should have a gradient of at least 2 cm/m. It should be led up to the machine.

� The water supply must have a pressure of at least 2 bar when water flows at 8 l/min. The maximum permissible pressure is 6 bar.

� A vented pipe siphon should be fitted to the drain line. (Fit the hose connection in the hopper with a hose ring holder). It should be positioned not less than 0.5 m below the machine drain connection.In unfavourable draining conditions the drain line between the machine and the siphon should be vented to prevent backpressure.

� The water, power and drain connection conditions specific to WMF should be observed in all cases.

� An opening should be made in one of the hatched areas (in the area of drawing combiNation F top view) or a hole

approximately 80 - 120 mm should be drilled to permit connection through the counter from below.

� Alternatively, the power, fresh water and drain connections can be led through the machine body from the back (area marked on top and side view drawings).

� If the local water has a carbonate hardness of more than 5° (German hardness), a WMF water filter must be fitted. The Standard 9310, 9312 or Jumbo 9311 water filter can be chosen, according to requirements.

!!!The static water pressure must not exceed 6 bar.!!!

� If the site water pressure is exceeded, a component-tested pressure reducer should be fitted between the main stop valve and the machine or water filter.

Page 355: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/2 Connection

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-5

Additional notes for alternative routing of connections

Single coffee machine When the single coffee machine leaves the factory, it is prepared for routing of the inlet and outlet lines through the rear cover and from the rear through the base. See the photograph for details.

On all versions, the hose 48 0022 must be left in the position between valve urn and the Y-piece in which it was installed in the factory (see photograph above), so that the hose does not kink when the front door is adjusted. If the customer does not need the optional height adjustment of the front door, the slide should be secured in its normal position with a screw and a washer.

Through the rear cover Base (factory setting)

Slide

Hose 48.0022

Page 356: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-6

Through the bottom plate, at the rear Factory setting for the ship version or local conversion

Through the bottom plate near the brewer drain Local conversion Turn the Y-piece 33 2123 8000 by 180° and lay the hose 48 0042 forwards to the opening. Insert elbow 33 1543 4000 in the hole and connect hose 48 0042 to it from below.Alternatively, the drip tray can be drained separately. To do this, remove the rear T-piece 33 1543 5000 and fit an elbow33 1543 4000 or 33 2165 8000 in its place.Instead of using the HAT pipe, the brewer can be connected directly to the hose 48 0041 and the coupling 33 0629 7000 and the hose tape 33 0326 1000.

Page 357: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/2 Connection

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-7

1/2.2.1 Connecting the WMF water filter,WMF combiNation F

The WMF water filter must be installed if the water has a hardness of 9° dkH (German carbonate hardness) or more.

Technical data W x H x D Minimum fitting dimensions Standard 250

250x 500 x 400

x 400 mm

Jumbo 290 x 670 x 420 mm Weight in operation Standard 15 kg Jumbo 30 kg Max. fresh-water temperature 25°C Ambient temperature max. 35°C Working pressure max. 6 bar Connecting hose length 1.5 m

Page 358: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-8

1/2.3 Safety instructions in preparation for connection

� The operator of the coffee machine is responsible for ensuring the site preparations for machine connection are properly carried out.

� The operator must ensure compliance with local installation regulations. Guidance is provided by the checklist in preparation for connection and the planning information.

The following points should also be observed:

� When installing electric wiring, it must be ensured that it does not interfere with any mechanical functions and that no short-circuits can occur.

� The mains lead must not be in contact with sharp edges (shearing hazard).

� Cables and wiring must not be allowed to come into contact with hot components.

� Pipes and other ducts and lines must be installed so that they are not in contact with other components and do not cause a nuisance due to striking noise.

� Connection of the machine to existing connections prepared by the site operator must only be carried out by WMF SERVICE personnel.

See“Checklist in preparation for connection” chapter 1/2.2

“Safety instructions for connection” chapter 1.2.5

“Starting up” chapter 1/3

Page 359: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/2 Connection

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-9

1/2.4 Connection checklist

� All preparations have been properly carried out and checked with reference to the checklist in preparation for connection.

� Compare mains voltage with data on the rating plate. � Users are familiar with the hazards and safety instructions in the

Operating Instructions. � Information on stickers on the machine and rating plate is observed. � Fastening holes in the counter should be drilled if necessary as

shown on the combiNation F top view drawing. The machine is secured with M10 bolt.

� In special cases, a cover panel should be fitted.

View of WMF combiNation F

WMF combiNation F single coffee machine

WMF combiNation F double coffee machine

“Checklist in preparation for connection” chapter 1/2.2

“Safety instructions for connection” chapter 1.2.5

“Starting up” chapter 1/3

"Laying the drain line" See photos in chapter 1/2.2

Page 360: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-10

Side view, WMF combiNation F - single coffee machine

Side view, WMF combiNation F - double coffee machine

with

with

Page 361: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/2 Connection

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-11

Top view, WMF combiNation F - single coffee machine

Top view, WMF combiNation F - double coffee machine

Page 362: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-12

Front and side views, Chocolate dispenser

Page 363: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/2 Connection

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-13

Front and side views, grounds ejector

Page 364: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/2-14

1/2.5 Safety instructions for connection

1/2.5.1 Instructions to be followed:

� Safety instructions chapter 1/2.3 � Exposed parts must be permanently and correctly connected to the

earth conductor. This also applies to screwed connections secured by toothed lock washers. Toothed lock washers are part of the safety system.

� When installing electric wiring, it must be ensured that it does not interfere with any mechanical functions and that no short-circuits can occur.

� Cables must not be in contact with sharp edges (shearing hazard). � Cables and wiring must not be in contact with hot components. � The machine must never be splashed or sprayed with water.

1/2.5.2 Regulations applicable / Approvals

Regulations EC conformity according to EC Directives 89/392/EC and 73/23/ECElectrical safety EN 60 335 T1, IEC/EN 60 335 T2-75 Water connection DIN 1988 Boiler in accordance with TRD 801 EC conformity testing according to EMC Directive 89/336/EC and/or EMC law of 09.11.92: - Interference transmission: EN 55 014-1/99, EN 55 022/95- Interference resistance: EN 50082-2/95

Approvals UL, CSA, NSF (scheduled for 2003) Testing Routine check testing to VDE regulations

� The hot water boiler complies with the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC category 1, module A.

� The hot water boiler is subject to neither notification nor licensing. Each hot water boiler is subjected to hydrostatic tests before delivery to the customer.

� The operator of such plants must ensure that the safety devices are properly serviced and inspected.

� The machine complies with all the relevant regulations. � The operator must ensure that the electrical equipment and systems

are in safe working order (e.g. VBG 4, § 5).

“Checklist in preparation for connection” chapter 1/2.2

“Safety instructions in preparation for connection” chapter 1.2.3

“Starting up” chapter 1/3

The Operating Instructions part 8 must be followed

Page 365: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/3 Starting the machine

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/3-1

1/3 Starting the machine

1/3.1 Safety instructions

� Connection of the machine to site services and starting up for the first time must only be carried out by WMF Service. All maintenance and repair work must only be carried out by WMF Service, using original parts.

� The integral safety devices must be kept in full working order and should in no circumstances be “repaired”, by-passed or altered. No machine body parts should be removed.

� If the machine power lead is damaged, it must be replaced by WMF Service or a similarly qualified specialist to avoid hazards.

� Hazard warnings and safety information in the Operating Instructions and on the stickers affixed to the machine must be observed

� This machine is intended only for supervised operation. At the end of the working day (machine unsupervised), always switch off the main power switch to which the machine is connected or unplug from the mains and close the site main stop valve on the fresh water inlet line.

� The machine should only be operated by trained personal. The owner or operator is responsible for training users.

� At regular intervals the coffee machine should be maintained, descaled and the safety devices tested to ensure they are in full working order.

� Key switch: product preparation, dispensing and cleaning can be stopped immediately by turning the key switch to the “off” position.

� The machine should not be covered while in operation. Adequate air circulation must be ensured at all times.

� The machine must not be cleaned with a spray jet or high-pressure cleaner.

Shutting down the machine – Extended periods

� If the machine is to be shut down for an extended period, it must first be cleaned and the grounds catcher emptied. If there is a risk of freezing up, it is essential to drain the machine before shutting down, to avoid frost damage (Service).

� When the machine has been shut down for several weeks, the cleaning program must be run at least twice before using the machine again.

See“Maintenance intervals” Maintenance schedule Part 5 “Service”

The Operating Instructions part 8 must be followed

Page 366: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/3-2

There is a scald hazard in the following areas of the machine:

� in the hot water dispensing area, � in the coffee dispensing area

During the heating-up phase after switching on, hot water may flow out of the coffee and hot water spouts.

� Caution when the front door spout is raised: a container must always be placed beneath it! Ensure that the container cannot tip over!

Never leave the container unattended!

There is a risk of crush injury in the following areas: � in the ground coffee hopper, � in the cleaning granulate hopper, � in the sliding area of the front door. � Never reach into these areas when the machine is switched on. � In the chocolate dispenser portioner. Never operate the machine

without the hopper. � Never operate the chocolate dispenser without the mixing cup and

the mixer housing in place. There is a health hazard in the following areas: � While cleaning is taking place. The cleaner is caustic.

Follow the precautions on the pack when handling the cleaner. � During cleaning, cleaning fluid runs out of the coffee spout. The

cleaning adapters must be installed . � Do not place a pot of cup under the coffee spout during the cleaning

operation.� Do not insert the cleaning tablet via the manual input until

requested to do so by the display. � Only original WMF cleaning granulate

(Order No. 33.2118 6000) may be used. � Never reach under the spouts while cleaning is taking place. � The manual input may be used only for insertion of standard

commercial ground coffee or mild coffee (for sampling) or of cleaning granulate (during cleaning).

Scald hazard

Risk of crush injury

Healthhazard

Page 367: Training Manual CombiNationF

1/3 Starting the machine

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/3-3

1/3.2 Start-up procedure Connection of the machine and starting up for the first time should only be carried out by WMF Service.

Check the machine connection checklist. Check machine for damage in transit. Check that all the accessories are complete. Check the accompanying documents. Remove all devices attached to secure the machine during transport. Switch on main power switch to which the machine is connected. (see Settings checklist) Open main stop valve on the fresh water inlet and check that the connections are tight. For further procedure, please refer to Part 5 „SERVICE“

See“Software“ Part 4

Brewer chapter 2/3

“Service program” “Component test” “Machine Datas” Part 4 “Software”

Page 368: Training Manual CombiNationF

Basics

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

1/3-4

Page 369: Training Manual CombiNationF

10/0 Index

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

10/1-1

Part 10 - Index

1

1st run-up (SE) 4/12 - · 30

A

Abbreviations 0/0- · 3 Aborting brewing 4/13- · 1 Accounting

Checker 2/8- · 17 Credit mode 2/8- · 4 Credit mode with credit key 2/8- · 4 Debit mode 2/8- · 5 Free credit mode 2/8- · 4 mandatory table input 2/8- · 6 operating modes 2/8- · 4 Parallel 2/8- · 13 Switch · 17 Table input 2/8- · 5 Table protection off 2/8- · 8 Table protection on 2/8- · 8 Vending machines 2/8- · 16 Waiter-related credit mode 2/8- · 5 Without mandatory table input 2/8- · 6

Accounting card reader 2/8 - · 23 Card reader 8-price 2/8 - · 25 Card reader Display 2/8 - · 24 Card reader Keypad 2/8 - · 24 coin changer Display 2/8 - · 21 coin changer Keypad 2/8 - · 21 coin changer MDB 2/8 - · 19 coin checker 2/9 - · 16 Power supply unit · 28 serial 4/12- · 26 Serial 4/9- · 1 Serial extension with MDB module 2/8 - · 22, 24 Unit with accounting facility 4/9- · 1 Unit without accounting facility 4/9- · 1

Accounting 4/12- · 25 Accounting 4/9- · 1 Accounting options 2/8- · 1 Accounting parallel

Not enabled by dispensing system 2/8- · 14 Time sequence of product release 2/8- · 14

Accounting Parallel General 2/8- · 13

Accounting pParallel Power supply connection, CAN connection 2/8- · 14

Accounting unit SE 2/8- · 1 Address of WMF AG 1/2- · 1 Adjustable aperture - chocolate dispenser 2/10 - · 5 Adjusting the inlet nozzle 5/7- · 2 alternative routing of connections 1/2- · 5 Approvals 1/2- · 15

B

Ball valve 2/11- · 4 Basic modules 1/1 · 5 Basics - Part 1 1/0- · 1 Boiler 2/2- · 7 Boiler and pipework 2/2- · 1 Boiler heaters 2/2- · 8 Boiler manometer 2/2- · 9 Boiler safety valve 2/2- · 11 Boiler system 2/2- · 6 Brewer base 2/3- · 3 Brewer drive 2/3- · 2 Brewer drive, cam disc 2/3- · 2 Brewer drive, motor 2/3- · 2 Brewer top section 2/3- · 4 Brewing chamber positions 2/3- · 7 Brewing pauses 4/13- · 1 Brewing pressure manometer 2/2- · 18 Brewing sequences 4/13- · 1 Brewing unit 2/3- · 1, 2 Brewing valve 2/2- · 15 Brewing valve nozzle 2/2- · 15 Brewing-water system 2/2- · 14 Burst protection 2/2- · 11

C

Cable between machine and mounting plate 2/8- · 21 Cable connecting coin checker to main machine 2/8- · 18 Cable forms 2/7- · 4 Card reader (KL) (example) 2/8- · 27 Card reader (SE) 4/12- · 39 Checklist in preparation for connection 1/2- · 2 Chocolate dispenser

adjustable aperture 2/10 - · 5 Adjustable spout 2/10 - · 8 cold water valve 2/10 - · 5 Daily cleaning 3/3 - · 1 Door switch/safety switch 2/10 - · 9 Fan 2/10 - · 8 Front panel/dispensing key 2/10 - · 9 Hot water connection to combiNation 2/10 - · 6 hot water valve (heated) 2/10 - · 4 HW valve heating 2/10 - · 5 Intermediate cleaning 3/3 - · 1 Mixer housing 2/10 - · 8 Mixer system 2/10 - · 7 piping system 2/10 - · 4 SSR 2/10 - · 7 Weekly cleaning 3/3 - · 2

chocolate dispenser start keys 5/1 - · 6 Chocolate powder hopper

Auger 2/10 - · 2 Base unit 2/10 - · 2 Empty message 2/10 - · 1

10

Page 370: Training Manual CombiNationF

Appendix

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

10/1-2

HW valve aperture 2/10 - · 4 Motor 2/10 - · 2

Chocolate powder hopper (SPP) 2/10 - · 1 Chocolate products (SE) 4/13- · 5 Cleaning

Granulate light barrier with solenoid 2/9- · 2 solenoid 2/9- · 2

Cleaning 4/5- · 1 Cleaning Part 3 3/0- · 1 Cleaning granulate portioner

complete 2/9- · 1 Cleaning motor 2/3- · 5 Cleaning the chocolate dispenser 3/3 - · 1 Cleaning the machine 2/9- · 1 Cleaning the machine 3/1- · 1 Coding of the limit switches 2/3- · 8 Coffee hoppers 2/1- · 1 Coffee spout 2/4- · 5 Coffee storage

Preselection quantities 4/3- · 2 Coffee storage 4/3- · 1 Coffee valve group 2/4- · 5 Coffee hose heater 2/4- · 4 Coin changer

complete · 20 Coin checker 2/8- · 16 Coin checker 4/12- · 11 Coin drawer 2/8- · 18, 20 Coin slot 2/8- · 17, 19 Coin tester 2/8- · 19 Cold water connection 2/2- · 2 Cold water inlet 2/2- · 2 combiNation chocolate dispenser 2/10 - · 1 Component test

brief description 4/12- · 16 chocolate dispenser 4/12 - · 19 examples of tests 4/12- · 18 submenu cleaning 4/12- · 17 submenu controls 4/12- · 17 submenu portioner 4/12- · 16 submenu storage urn 4/12- · 17

Component test 4/12- · 15 Chocolate dispenser · 19 Conditions of installation 1/1- · 13 Connecting the WMF 1/2- · 1 Connection (SE) 4/12 - · 39 Connection checklist 1/2- · 9 Connection nipple 2/2- · 4 Control panel complete 2/6- · 1 Controls 2/6- · 1 Coupling Relay 2/7- · 4 cover panel 1/2- · 9 Crank, complete 2/3- · 5 credit 4/12- · 27 Credit pen debit mode 4/12- · 27 Credit pen mode (SE) 4/12 - · 27 Credit pen number (SE) 4/12 - · 27 Credit-pool mode 4/12- · 27 Customer service - service information 4/12- · 24

D

Daily cleaning 3/1- · 1 Debit 4/12- · 26 Default values 5/1- · 3 Parallel · 40 Descaling programme 5/8- · 5

Description of components 1/1- · 4 Designation of machine parts 1/1- · 3 Dialogue (SE) 4/12 - · 29 dialogues - general notes 4/1- · 3 Distribution sieve 2/3- · 4, 5 double click 2/2- · 12 Drawings Part 6 6/0- · 1

E

earth conductor 1/2- · 15 Electrical connection 1/2- · 3 Electrical system 2/7- · 1 Electronics 2/6- · 1 Engineering - Part 2 2/0 · 1 Error list 5/8- · 9 Extended periods 1/3- · 1

F

Factory settings Brewing cycles 5/1- · 6

Factory settings (Default values) 5/1- · 3 Factory settings for portioning 5/1- · 5 Factory settings for Product data 5/1- · 5 Fan 2/3- · 6 Fastening holes 1/2.4- · 9 Flow meter 2/2- · 18 Front and side views

Chocolate dispenser 1/2 - · 12 grounds ejector 1/2 - · 13

Front door 2/5 · 1 Front door, alignment and ease of movement 5/7- · 2 Front panel 2/8- · 16 Fully-automatic cleaning 3/2- · 1 Functions in the selection menu 4/2- · 1

G

General information 1/1- · 1 General information on cleaning 3/1- · 1 General notes 5/8- · 2 Goggles 5/8- · 1 Ground-coffee portioner – motor -2/1- · 3 Grounds container 2/11- · 3 Grounds container sieve 2/11- · 3 Grounds ejector

Frame 2/11- · 3 Rinsing nozzle 2/11- · 2 Sieve of first filter 2/11- · 2 Upper section with first filter 2/11- · 2

Grounds ejector 2/11- · 1 Grounds sensor 2/11- · 4

H

health hazard 1/3- · 3 Heater protection relay 2/7- · 2 Heating-up phase 2/2- · 7 Hot water dispensing 4/14- · 1 Hot water button 2/5- · 4 Hot water output 2/2- · 12 Hot water output 2/6- · 3 Hot water output valve 2/2- · 13 Hot water spout 2/2- · 13

Page 371: Training Manual CombiNationF

0/0 Index

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

10/1-3

Hot water spout with sieve 2/2- · 10 How to use this Manual 0/0- · 4

I

Important infos 5/10- · 1 Industrial safety 5/8- · 1 Information

Service 4/11- · 2 timer 4/11- · 2

Information 4/11- · 1 Inlet funnel 2/3- · 5 Inlet rinsing nozzle 2/3- · 6 Inlet rinsing valve 2/2- · 16 Inlet valves

double coffee machine 2/4- · 5 inlets and outlets 2/4- · 4 Installation of SE 5/9- · 8 Installation of waiter lock 5/9- · 9 Installing retrofit modules 5/9 - · 1 Installing the chocolate connection · 1 Instructions 1/2- · 15 Interface (SE) 4/12 - · 29 Interface with cable set 2/8- · 11

J

Jet valve nozzle urn1 2/2- · 16 Jet valve urn1 2/2- · 16

K

Key switch 2/6- · 2

L

Legend to button fields 4/1.2- · 2 Level controller for storage urn 2/4- · 3 Light barrier GCH 2/1- · 4 limit switches 2/3/ · 8

M

Machine data accessory unit 4/12- · 10 accounting 4/12- · 11 boiler 4/12- · 10 cleaning 4/12- · 6 counters 4/12- · 5 double click 4/12- · 12 error list 4/12- · 6 filter replacement 4/12- · 8 grounds catcher 4/12- · 9 maintenance counter 4/12- · 7 self service mode 4/12- · 12 service date 4/12- · 7 standards 4/12- · 13 storage urn 4/12- · 10

Machine data 4/12- · 5 Machine parts 1/1- · 2 mains 5/8- · 1 Maintenance 5/8- · 1 Maintenance schedule 5/8- · 3 Maintenance sets 5/8- · 7

Mandatory table-number input (SE) 4/12 - · 28 Manual dispensing 4/10- · 1 Manual input 2/1- · 4 Mechanical adjustments 5/7- · 1 Memory (SE) 4/12 - · 29 Mixer motor with interference filter 2/10 - · 7 Münzprüfer

Frontblende 2/8- · 16

N

Non-return valve 2/2- · 4 Not enabled by coffee machine 2/8- · 14

O

Operating instructions part 8 8/0- · 1 Operation without accounting 4/12 - · 41 Operation without ISB or external MC3 2/8- · 8 Optional modules 1/1- · 6 Outlet rinsing valve 2/2- · 17 Output quantity · 5 Overview software

component test 5/4- · 1 Overview software

machine data 5/3- · 1 service info 5/6- · 1 service routines 5/5- · 1

P

ParallelStandards 4/12 - · 32

Parallel 4/12- · 31 Parallel - Adjustable activation times 4/12 - · 31 Parallel - Allocation of price categories 4/12 - · 32 Parallel extension board 2/8- · 15 PCB 2/6- · 1 PIN input 4/7- · 1 Piston 2/3- · 3 Planning information1/2- · 1 Power stage 2/6- · 1 Preparing for connection 1/2- · 1 Pressure reducer 2/2- · 5 Price line 4/12- · 28 Probe 2/4- · 3 Product data 4/12- · 2 Product data

settings brewing 4/12- · 3

R

Rating plate 1/1- · 11 rectifier and filter capacitor 2/7- · 2 Regulations applicable 1/2- · 15 Rights - authorisations/PIN 4/8- · 1 Rinsing valve Urn 1 2/2- · 17 risk of crush injury 1/3- · 3

S

Safety devices 5/8- · 1 Safety instructions

connections 1/2- · 8

Page 372: Training Manual CombiNationF

Appendix

© WMF combiNation F edition 04/2007 - OTS

10/1-4

Safety instructions 5/8- · 1 Safety instructions for connection 1/2- · 15 Safety temperature limiter 2/2- · 10 Safety valves

function 5/8- · 1 scald hazard 1/3- · 3 SE module 2/8- · 27 Select language (SE) 4/12- · 37 Semi-automatic cleaning 3/2 · 4 Serial

Function 2/8- · 3 General 2/8- · 3

Serial 2/8- · 3 Serial 4/8- · 1 Serial extension (SE) board 2/8- · 9 Serial, Routing the interface cables 2/9 - · 11 Serial, Waiter lock 2/9 - · 12 Service 4/12- · 1 Service - overview 4/12- · 1 Service Info (SE) 4/12- · 26 Service information

error list 4/12- · 24 front door 4/12- · 24 last service visit 4/12- · 24 power stage 4/12- · 24 software version 4/12- · 24

Service Part 5 5/0- · 1 Service routines

brewer rinsing 4/12- · 21 chocolate hopper adjustment 4/12- · 21 descaling programme 4/12- · 22 first run up 4/12- · 21 urn 1 calibration 4/12- · 21

Service routines 4/12- · 21 Setting

with the foil keypad 4/12 - · 33 Setting numeric values 4/1- · 3 Setting options 4/1.3- · 3 Setting the timer

Clearing the Timer 4/4- · 4 Copying functions between days 4/4- · 3 Timer overview 4/4- · 4

Setting the timer 4/4- · 2 Settings

Contrast 4/6- · 7 First Run Up 4/6- · 6 machine 4/6- · 4 Setting the timer 4/6- · 6 the date and time 4/6- · 6 the products 4/6- · 1

Settings 4/6- · 1 Settings checklist for starting up 5/1- · 1 Settings for coin acceptance BDV6 4/12 - · 36 Settings on the machine display (SE) 4/12- · 37 Shutting down the machine 1/3- · 1 Side view WMF combiNation F 1/2- · 10 Siting the machine 1/2- · 2 Sleeve 2/3- · 4 Software Part 4 4/0- · 1 Software overview 4/2- · 1 Software user guide 4/1- · 1 Spare parts 5/8- · 7 Spare-parts list Part 7 7/0- · 1 Standard versions 1/1 · 9 Start buttons

urn2 on double coffee machine 2/6- · 2 Start buttons 2/6- · 2

Safety instructions · 1 Starting the machine 1/3- · 1 Starting up 5/1- · 1 starting up for the first time 1/3- · 4 Starting up, procedure 1/3- · 4 Start-up procedure 1/3- · 4 Storage urn

complete 2/4- · 2 Storage urn and coffee output 2/4- · 1 Swirler 2/2- · 13 Switch · 17 Switch plate 2/3- · 3

T

Table number input 4/12- · 28 Table- protection (SE) 4/12 - · 28 Table-number input function (SE) 4/12 - · 28 Technical data

WMF water filter 1/2- · 7 Technical data 1/1- · 12 Technical data – chocolate dispenser 1/1- · 19 Technical data - heaters 1/1- · 17 Technical data - miscellaneous 1/1- · 17, 18 Technical data - motors 1/1- · 15 Technical data - relays 1/1- · 17 Technical data - valves 1/1- · 16 Temperature sensor 2/2- · 9 Testmode (SE) 4/12 - · 29 The cabling of the WMF combiNation S 2/7- · 4 Timer selection 4/4- · 1 Timer-controlled cleaning 3/2 · 6 Timing diagrams of brewing cycles 4/13- · 2 Toothed lock washers 1/2- · 15 Top view WMF combiNation F 1/2- · 11 Touch display 2/6- · 1 Transformer 2/7- · 4 Transformers 2/7- · 2 Troubleshooting 5/8- · 8

U

Urn 2 rinsing valve 2/4- · 6 Urn cover 2/4- · 4 Urn heater 2/4- · 2

V

Valve group 2/2- · 15 Vending machines 2/8- · 16 View of WMF combiNation F 1/2- · 9

W

Waiter function (SE) 4/12 - · 29 Waiter lock 2/8- · 12 Waiter lock (SE) 4/12 - · 29 Waiter transfer (SE) 4/12 - · 29 Water connection 1/2- · 4 Water distributor 2/2- · 4 Water pressure control device 2/2- · 5 WMF water filter 1/2- · 7